| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
Exhibit 08 Manual | Users Manual | 225.97 KiB | ||||
| 1 |
|
Exhibit 8 Design Guidelines | Users Manual | 163.68 KiB | June 06 2002 | |||
| 1 |
|
Exhibit 8 Integrators Manual | Users Manual | 2.34 MiB | July 06 2002 | |||
| 1 |
|
revised page | Users Manual | 20.85 KiB | November 06 2002 | |||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
| 1 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
| 1 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
| 1 | External Photos | |||||||
| 1 | Test Report | |||||||
| 1 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
| 1 | Internal Photos | |||||||
| 1 | RF Exposure Info | June 06 2002 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | June 06 2002 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | June 06 2002 |
| 1 | Exhibit 08 Manual | Users Manual | 225.97 KiB |
GM 47/GM 48 Technical Description CE The product described in this manual conforms to the Radio and Teleterminals directive 1999/5/EC with requirements covering EMC directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage directive 73/23/EEC. SAR statement: This product is intended to be used with the antenna or other radiating element 20 cm far away of the any part of the human body. The information contained in this document is the proprietary information of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications. The contents are confidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers, employees, agents or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications, is strictly prohibited. Further, no portion of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications, the copyright holder. Second edition (February 2002) Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications. publishes this manual without making any warranty as to the content contained herein. Further Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications. reserves the right to make modifications, additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors, inaccurate information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment at any time and without notice. Such changes will, nevertheless be incorporated into new editions of this manual. All rights reserved. Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications., 2002 Publication number:
Printed in UK Trademarks AIX is a trademark owned by International Business Machines Corporation GM47/48 Technical description Contents 1 1.1 1.2 INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................................5 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................5 FEATURES................................................................................................................6 Type of Mobile Station ......................................................................................6 SMS ................................................................................................................7 Voice calls .......................................................................................................7 Data.................................................................................................................7 SIM Card..........................................................................................................8 Power consumption ..........................................................................................8 Other features ..................................................................................................8 Development Kit...............................................................................................8 PRECAUTIONS...........................................................................................................9 ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................................9 2 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................11 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 1.2.7 1.2.8 1.3 1.4 2.1 2.2 INTERFACE DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................11 PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS.............................................................................................12 SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE...........................................................................13 3 3.6 3.5 3.4 3.3 3.4.1 3.2.1 3.1 3.2 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.3.1 3.3.2 OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................13 GENERAL ELECTRICAL AND LOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS................................................16 General Protection Requirements....................................................................16 GROUNDS ..............................................................................................................16 The Analogue Ground.....................................................................................17 The Digital Ground (DGND).............................................................................17 REGULATED POWER SUPPLY ....................................................................................17 Power Supply (VCC).......................................................................................18 ON/OFF AND EXTERNAL POWER SIGNALS..................................................................18 Module ON/OFF .............................................................................................18 External 2.75 V (VIO)......................................................................................19 ANALOGUE AUDIO ...................................................................................................19 Audio To Mobile Station (ATMS)......................................................................20 Audio From Mobile Station (AFMS)..................................................................22 3.7 MICROPHONE SIGNALS ............................................................................................22 SPEAKER SIGNALS ..................................................................................................23 3.8 3.9 DIGITAL AUDIO........................................................................................................23 3.10 SERIAL DATA..........................................................................................................24 3.10.1 UART 1 (RS232) - RD, TD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD and RI.................................26 3.10.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD ...........................................................................26 3.10.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI ......................................................27 3.10.4 UART 2 - TD2, RD2........................................................................................29 3.10.5 UART 3 - TD3, RD3........................................................................................29 3.11 SIM CARD RELATED SIGNALS....................................................................................30 3.11.1 SIM Detection SIM Presence........................................................................31 3.12 SERVICE/PROGRAMMING ..........................................................................................31 3.13 BUZZER .................................................................................................................32 3.14 LED......................................................................................................................32 3.15 TX_ON - BURST TRANSMISSION ...............................................................................33 3.16 TIMESTAMP ............................................................................................................33 3.17 REAL TIME CLOCK...................................................................................................34 ANTENNA CONNECTOR............................................................................................35 4 BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 3 GM47/48 Technical description 5 6 AT COMMAND SUMMARY..........................................................................................36 TECHNICAL DATA .....................................................................................................39 BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 4 GM47/48 Technical description 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview The GM47/48 belong to a new generation of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications GSM modules. This document describes the main characteristics and functionality of the GM 47/48, two dual band products for 900/ 1800 MHz and 850/1900 MHz GSM bands respectively. They are intended to be used in both machine-to-machine applications and man-to-machine applications. The module serves its purpose when there is a need for sending and receiving data (by SMS, CSD, HSCSD, or GPRS), as well as making voice calls over the GSM network. GM47/48 are business-to-business products. It is intended to be sold to manufacturers, system integrators, applications developers-
developing solutions with wireless communication. The module is intended to be integrated by the system integrator within an application. The module and the external application will form a system for wireless communication. A typical system is one where a micro controller in an external application communicates with the module over its serial interface. The micro controller will control the module, via the supported set of AT commands. It is assumed that the system integrators have a high technical knowledge and the ability to integrate the module into a system. For the GM47/48 modules some interesting applications are the following:
Fleet and Asset Management Vending Machines Security and Alarm Other telemetry applications BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 5 GM47/48 Technical description 1.2 Features The module performs a set of telecom services (TS) according to GSM standard phase 2+, ETSI and ITU-T. The functions of the module are implemented by issuing AT commands over the serial interface. Supported AT commands are listed in section 5, these are defined further in GSM 7.05. 1.2.1 Type of Mobile Station The GM 4X family are normal dual band type of MS with the following characteristics. GM 47 Frequency Range
(MHz) GSM 900 TX: 890-915 RX: 935-960 E-GSM 900 TX: 880-890 RX: 925-935 GSM 1800 TX: 1710-1785 RX: 1805-1880 Channel spacing Number of channels 200 kHz 173 Carriers *8 (TDMA) 200 kHz 374 Carriers *8 (TDMA) GSM: Channels 1 to 124 DCS: Channels 512 to 885 E-GSM: Channels 975 to 1023 Modulation GMSK GMSK TX Phase Accuracy Duplex spacing
< 5 RMS Phase error (burst) 45 MHz
< 5 RMS Phase error (burst) 95 MHz Receiver sensitivity at antenna connector
< - 102 dBm Transmitter output power at antenna connector Class 4
< - 102 dBm Class 1 2W (33 dBm) 1W (30 dBm) Automatic hand-over between GSM 900 and GSM 1800 GM 48 Frequency Range (MHz) GSM 850 TX: 824-849 RX: 869-894 GSM 1900 TX: 1850-1910 RX: 1930-1990 Channel spacing Number of channels 200 kHz 123 carriers *8 (TDMA) 200 kHz 298 Carriers *8 (TDMA) GSM: Channels 128 to 251 PCS: Channels 512 to 810 Modulation GMSK GMSK TX Phase Accuracy
< 5 RMS Phase error (burst)
< 5 RMS Phase error (burst) Duplex spacing Receiver sensitivity at antenna connector 45 MHz
< - 102 dBm Transmitter output power at antenna connector Class 5 0.8 W (29 dBm) 80 MHz
< - 102 dBm Class 1 1W (30 dBm) BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 6 GM47/48 Technical description Automatic hand-over between GSM 850 and GSM 1900 1.2.2 SMS The module supports the following SMS services:
Sending: MO, both PDU and Text mode supported. Receiving: MT, both PDU and Text mode supported. CBM is a service, in which a message is sent to all subscribers located in one or more specific cell(s) in the GSM network, for example, cell location information. SMS STATUS REPORT according to GSM 03.40. SMS COMMAND according to GSM 03.40. The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using 7-bit encoding. For 8-bit data, the maximum length is 140 bytes. The module does support upto 6 concatenated messages to extend this function. The GM47/48 offers the capability of MO and MT voice calls, as well as supporting emergency calls. In addition to this multiparty, call waiting and call deflection features are available. Some of these features are operator specific. The module offers normal analogue input/output lines, analogue audio input/ output lines in differential modes, and digital audio interface, with the possibility of accessing internal points within the digital audio lines. Moreover, the GM 47/GM48 has embedded echo canceller and noise suppresser, which provides high quality audio. The module supports both HR, FR and EFR voice coding, provided that EFR is available in the network. The module supports the following data protocols:
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS). The modules are Class B Terminals, which provides simultaneous activation and attach of GPRS and GSM services. The GM47/48 modules are GPRS 3+1 devices, which are capable of transmitting in one timeslot per frame (uplink), and receiving in a maximum of three timeslots per frame (downlink). Circuit Switched Data (CSD). GM47/48 modules are capable to stablish a circuit switch data communication at 9.6 kbps, V42bis compression is not supported. 1.2.3 Voice calls 1.2.4 Data BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 7 GM47/48 Technical description High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD). GM47/48 support HSCSD communication, with one timeslot per frame capacity in the uplink and two timeslots per frame capacity in the downlink
(2+1). 1.2.5 SIM Card The module supports the connection of an external SIM Card with 3V and 5 V technology, via the 60-pin system connector. The module does not have an internal SIM holder. 1.2.6 Power consumption GSM 850 & 900 MHz GSM 1800 & 1900 MHz Stand-by1 20 mA 20 mA Transmit/Operation 275 mA (2A peak) 250 mA (1.75A peak) Note! The power consumption during transmission is measured at maximum transmit power. 1.2.7 Other features Internet Ready Module 07.10 Multiplexing Bluetooth interoperability GPS interoperability SIM application toolkit, class 2 release 96 compliant 1.2.8 Development Kit Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications provides the opportunity to test the module in a limited scale, before ordering a large quantity. With the development kit you can quickly get started with the module. The kit includes necessary accessories (software and hardware) that you will need for your test purposes. It also includes the following:
GSM module GM 47 or GM 48 Warranty Sheet Integrators Manual 1 This figures are tentative data, subject to change. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 8 GM47/48 Technical description The Integrators Manual provides you with all the information you need to be able to integrate the module with your application. 1.3 Precautions The GM47/48 should be handled like any mobile station. In the Integrators Manual you will find more information about safety and product care. In the Technical Data chapter in this document the environmental and electrical limits are specified. Never exceed these limits to ensure the module is not damaged. 1.4 Abbreviations Abbreviation Explanation BT CBS CBM CSD DCE DTE DTMF EFR EMC ETSI FR GPRS GPS GSM HR HSCSD ITU-T ME MO MS MT PCM PDU RLP RF RTC Bluetooth Cell Broadcast Service Cell Broadcast Messaging Circuit Switch Data Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Data Terminal Equipment Dual Tone Multi Frequency Enhanced Full Rate codec Electro-Magnetic Compatibility European Telecommunications Standards Institute Full Rate codec General Packet Radio Service Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile Comunication Half Rate codec High Speed Circuit Switched Data International Telecommunication Union Telecommunications Standardisation Sector Mobile Equipment Mobile Originated Mobile Station Mobile Terminated Pulse Code Modulation Protocol Data Unit Radio Link Protocol Radio Frequency Real Time Clock BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 9 GM47/48 Technical description SDP SMS SIM TBD Service Discovery Protocol Short Message Service Subscriber Identity Module To Be Defined BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 10 GM47/48 Technical description 2 Mechanical Description 2.1 Interface Description The picture below presents the conceptual mechanical design of the GM 47/48. The GM 47/48 are protected with AISI 304 Stainless Steel covers suitable to fulfil the environmental and EMC requirements. Dimensions, the position of the different connectors and mounting holes are shown in figure 2.2. Figure 2.1 GM 47/48, view from the underside BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 11 GM47/48 Technical description 2.2 Physical Dimensions Figure 2.2 Physical dimensions of GM 47/48 The measures are given in millimetres. See also chapter 6, Technical Data. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 12 GM47/48 Technical description 3 System Connector Interface 3.1 Overview The electrical connections to the module (except the antenna), are set through the System Connector Interface. The connector shall allow the following connections: board to board and board to cable. The table below provides the two possible mating connectors for the application system:
No 1 2 Pin 60 60 Part Number 9462-9101-606 TBD Description Female connector (Speed Tech). Board-
Board Female connector. Board-Cable The figure 3.1 below indicates the pin numbering scheme. Figure 3.1 GM 47/48. View from the underside The table on next page provides the pin assignment of the different signals in the System Connector Interface as well as a short description of them. All signal directions are with respect to the module i.e. Direction 'O'
means data being sent by the module. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 13 GM47/48 Technical description Pin Signal Name Dir Signal Type Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND
Supply
Supply
Supply
Supply
Supply
Supply
Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground 13. Reserved for future use 14. ON/OFF 15. SIMVCC I
Internal pull up, open drain Dig. 3/5 V Turns the module on/off Former WAKE_B SIM card power supply 16. SIMPRESENCE I Internal pull up, open drain 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. SIMRST SIMDATA SIMCLK DAC IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 VRTC ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 SDA 30. SCL 31. 32. BUZZER TIMESTAMP O I/O O O I/O I/O I/O I/O I I I I I/O O O O Power output for SIM Card from module SIM Presence A "1" shall indicate that the SIM is missing;
a "0" that it is inserted. SIM card reset SIM card data SIM card clock Digital to Analogue converter Dig. 3/5 V Dig. 3/5 V Dig. 3/5 V Analogue Digital, 2.75 Digital, 2.75 General purpose input/output 1 General purpose input/output 2 Digital, 2.75 General purpose input/output 3 Digital, 2.75 General purpose input/output 4 Supply 1.8 V Voltage for real time clock Analogue Analogue Analogue 2.75, internal pullup 2.75, internal pullup Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Analogue to Digital converter 1 Analogue to Digital converter 2 Analogue to Digital converter 3 I2C Data I2C Clock Buzzer output from module Timestamp Timestamp is reserved for future use, if A-
GPS is implemented on network side. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 14 GM47/48 Technical description 33. 34. LED VIO 35. TX_ON 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. RI DTR DCD RTS CTS TD 42. RD 43. TD3 O O O O I O I O I O I Dig. 2.75 Flashing LED Power Out 2.75 Module powered indication. Dig 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 The VIO is a 2.75 V output that could power external devices to transmit data towards the GSM device to a 75mA max. This output shall indicate when the GSM module is going to transmit the burst. Ring Indicator Data Terminal Ready Data Carrier Detect Request To Send Clear To Send Transmitted Data Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module).
[former DTMS]
Received Data Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host).
[former DFMS]
Dig. 2.75 UART3 Transmission Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module).
[former DTMS]
44. RD3 O Dig. 2.75 UART3 Reception Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module).
[former DTMS]
Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host).
[former DFMS]
Dig. 2.75 UART2 Reception Former CTMS. Used for flashing Dig. 2.75 UART2 Transmission Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host).
[former DFMS]
Former CFMS. Used for flashing DSP PCM digital audio input DSP PCM digital audio output Codec PCM digital audio output Codec PCM digital audio input DSP PCM frame sync DSP PCM clock output Microphone input positive Microphone input negative Speaker output positive Speaker output negative Audio output from module Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue 45. TD2 46. RD2 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. PCMULD PCMDLD PCMO PCMI PCMSYNC PCMCLK 53. MICP 54. MICN 55. BEARP 56. 57. BEARN AFMS I O I O O I O O I I O O O BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 15 GM47/48 Technical description 58. SERVICE 59. 60. ATMS AGND I I
12V/2.7V Flash programming voltage for the MS. Enable logger information if no flashing Former VPPFLASH Analogue Audio input to module
Analogue ground 3.2 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics Many of the signals present in the interface are high-speed CMOS logic inputs or outputs powered from 2.75 V 5 %. Whenever a signal is defined as Dig. 2.75 V, the following electrical characteristics shall apply. Parameter Min. Typ. Max. High Level Output Voltage (VOH) Low Level Output Voltage (VOL) High Level Input Voltage (VIH) Low Level Input voltage (VIL) 2.2 0 1.93 0 2.75 0.6 2.75 0.5 Output current Io
- 2 mA 2 mA Units Volts Volts Volts Volts 3.2.1 General Protection Requirements All 2.75V digital inputs shall continuously withstand any voltage from
-0.5V up to 3.47V (3.3V + 5%) in the power-on or power-off condition with no damage. All 2.75V digital outputs shall continuously withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range from 0V to 3V. The SIM output signals and the SIMVCC supply shall continuously withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range from 0V to 4.1V. 3.3 Grounds Pins 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 60 Name DGND AGND Description Digital Ground Analogue Ground BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 16 GM47/48 Technical description There are two ground signals in GM 47/48, Analogue Ground
(AGND) and Digital Ground (DGND). The analogue Ground is connected to pin number 60, and the Digital Ground is connected to the System Connector Interface through pin numbers 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 and 12. Note: All the Ground pins have to be connected to the application. The AGND is connected to the DGND in the ME, and only there. It is important that the AGND and the DGND are separated in the application. 3.3.1 The Analogue Ground The AGND lead is the analogue audio reference ground. It is the return signal for Audio To Mobile Station (ATMS) and Audio From Mobile Station (AFMS). It shall be connected to the Digital Ground (DGND) inside the module and only there. The application shall not connect DGND and AGND. Parameter Imax Limit
@ 12.5mA 3.3.2 The Digital Ground (DGND) DGND is the reference for all digital signals in the System Interface. It shall also be the DC return for the power supply on VCC and SERVICE. Each DGND pin is rated at 0.5 A. All DGND pins are connected internally in the module. Parameter Iaverage Imax Limit
< 0.5 A No DGND pin can withstand over 0.5 A
< 600 mA (100 mA each) 3.4 Regulated Power Supply Pins 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Name VCC Description Regulated Power Supply The regulated power supply, VCC, is connected to the pin numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 17 GM47/48 Technical description 3.4.1 Power Supply (VCC) The VCC supplies the module with external power. Any other voltage needed is generated internally. Parameter Voltage to be applied Mode Limit Nominal Tolerance including ripple 2 3.4 Volts - 4.0 Volts Over voltages 3.6 Volts 5.5 Volts Current Drive capability at TX Full Power
< 600 mA (average))
< 2 A (Peak) GM 47/48 have not internal capacitance to supply the large current peaks during GSM transmission. Therefore on burst transmission the application DC source is responsible for providing the appropriate current. 3.5 ON/OFF and External Power Signals Pins 14 34 Name ON/OFF VIO Dir Description I O Square signal to turn on/off the module External power supply 3.5.1 Module ON/OFF The module is powered ON/OFF by earthing (pulling low) pin 14 as per figure 3.2 below. The pin should then be released as it is an internal pull up to return it to the high state. Note: Driving with 2.75V or 3.6V is not permitted and restrict module functionality. Parameter Minimum Typical Maximum Units Voltage HIGH Level (FALSE) Voltage LOW Level (TRUE) 0 Pull-up Resistance Internal pull up VCC 0.3*VCC 39 By internal pull up only Volts KW 2 Measured at system connector pins. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 18 GM47/48 Technical description Figure 3.2ON/OFF and VIO performance Where the times are defined as follows:
Time tMR tPWR Description Time to start an ON/OFF operation Time for module start-up one ON/ OFF signal has set to TRUE Typ 1.5 Min 1 100 Max Unit S Ms 200 3.5.2 External 2.75 V (VIO) The VIO has been derived from a 2.75 V regulator. It is possible to use this output as a power supply at 2.75 V with a maximum of 75mA. It will indicate that the module is alive and it could power external devices. In this case, the external applications do not need to implement a 2.75 volt regulator to adapt the incoming (from module point of view) serial data. Parameter Output Voltage (Iload=50 mA) Load current Minimum Typical Maximum Units 2.70 2.75 2.85 75 Volts mA 3.6 Analogue Audio Pins 57 59 60 Name AFMS ATMS AGND Dir O I
Description Audio From Mobile Station Audio To Mobile Station Reference for analogue audio BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 19 GM47/48 Technical description ATMS and AFMS are the audio input and output for the module. The analogue audio signals can be used in two different modes, Normal and Portable Handsfree. Handsfree This mode is referred to as Audio To Mobile Station (ATMS) and Audio From Mobile Station (AFMS). It is used by audio accessories such as Handsets and Handsfree equipment. Portable Handsfree This mode activates a different amplification factor in the Mobile Equipment (ME). It also activates a microphone bias level in ATMS. This is the default mode. 3.6.1 Audio To Mobile Station (ATMS) ATMS is the analogue audio input to the module. It connects to the audio input of the CODEC in the module. The CODEC then converts the analogue audio to digital audio, in PCM format, which is connected to the internal PCM bus in the module. The internal PCM bus connects the encoded audio to PCMO on the system connector. ATMS is also used as the microphone input from the Portable Handsfree. If this is the case, a DC bias is provided from the ATMS. All sources must be AC-coupled except the Portable HandsFree microphone, which shall be DC-coupled in order to supply DC current to the Portable HandsFree microphone. AC coupling prevents incorrect biasing or damage of the ATMS input. The capacitor must have a value greater than shown below to avoid attenuation of low frequencies. The ATMS input is a passive network followed by the transmit part of the CODEC. Parameter Application driving impedance (0.3 - 3.5 kHz) AC coupling capacitance 3 Module input impedance (0.3 - 3.5 kHz) Low frequency cut-off (- 3 dB) High frequency cut-off (- 3 dB) Maximum allowed input level Output DC bias level Handsfree mode Limit
< 300 W
> 1 m F
>50K 300 Hz 50 Hz
> 3500 Hz 1.5Vpp = 530mV 0 V 3 AC coupling capacitance must be supplied by the application, unless a DC coupled microphone is used. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 20 W GM47/48 Technical description Additional Gain in Portable Handsfree mode Portable Handsfree mode 2 V 0.1 V 28.5 dB Maximum input level at ATMS 245mVrms output at PCMO =
3dBm0 The following table is with nominal PGA (Programmable Gain Settings) For more information see AT commands Input ATMS Input Volts mVrms 245 TXAGC dB AUXI1 Gain PCMO dBm0 0 13 3 Maximum input level at MICI 61.4mVrms output at PCMO = 3dBm0 Input MICI Input PCMI Input PCMI Input Volts mVrms 61.4 TXAGC dB AUXI1 Gain PCMO dBm0 0 25 3 Output at AUX02 for 3dBm0 at PCMI dBm0 3dBm0 RXPGA 0 Volume Control dB 0 AUX02 mVrms 436 Output at BEAR for 3dBm0 at PCMI dBm0 3dBm0 RXPGA 0 Volume Control dB 0 BEAR mVrms 388 BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 21 GM47/48 Technical description 3.6.2 Audio From Mobile Station (AFMS) AFMS is the analogue audio output from the module. When it is active, the output is derived from the PCM digital audio by the decoder part of the CODEC. The PCM data comes from PCMI on the system connector. It is also used as an ear-piece driver for the Portable Hands Free accessory. Parameter Speaker impedance AFMS Output Capacitance Levels (THD < 5 %) Limit 64 W t o 1K 2.2 m F 10%
> 2.4 Vpp [TBC]
(0.3 -
Drive capability into 5 kW 3.5 kHz) Drive capability into 1.5 kW 3.5 kHz) Drive capability into 150 W 1kHz)
(0.3 -
> 2.2 Vpp [TBC]
(at
> 1.3 Vpp [TBC]
3.7 Microphone Signals Pin 53 54 Speaker signals MICP MICN Dir I I Function Microphone Positive Input Microphone Negative Input MICP and MICN are the microphone-input pins. These inputs shall be compatible with an electret microphone. The microphone contains a FET buffer with open drain output, which must be supplied at least
+2V relative to ground. Figure 3.3 Microphone connection to module CCO is the source voltage that will provide the necessary drive current for the microphone. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 22 W GM47/48 Technical description Parameter CCO Limit 2.0 - 2.5 V 3.8 Speaker Signals Pin 55 56 Speaker signals BEARP BEARN Dir O O Function Microphone Positive Output Microphone Negative Output BEARP and BEARN are the speakers output pins. These outputs are in differential mode. 3.9 Digital Audio Pin PCM signal 52 51 47 48 50 49 PCMCLK PCMSYNC PCMULD PCMDLD PCMI PCMO Dir O O I O I O Function PCM clock PCM frame sync PCM audio input to DSP PCM audio output to DSP PCM audio input to Codec PCM audio output to Codec The digital PCM audio signals allow the connection of a digital audio source / receiver, bypassing the analogue audio CODEC processing functions performed within the module. Figure 3.4 Pin connections to digital audio BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 23 GM47/48 Technical description In case no external audio processing is performed, then it is needed to connect PCMDLD and PCMI PCMULD and PCMO Electrical characteristics The Dig. 2.75 V CMOS Output / Input electrical characteristics shall apply, with DGND as the reference. PCM interface format The PCM format (for PCMULD and PCMDLD) shall follow a linear PCM data I/O format of an industry standard Texas Instrument DSP. It is the same format as the one used between the CODEC and the DSP. The DSP is the source of the bit clock PCMCLK and the frame synchronisation PCMSYNC. The data bits in PCMULD and PCMDLD shall be aligned so that the MSB in each word occurs on the same clock edge. 3.10 Serial Data Pin Name Dir Description 41 42 39 40 37 38 36 45 46 43 44 TD RD RTS CTS DTR DCD RI TD2 RD2 TD3 RD3 I O I O I O O I O O I Serial data to module Serial data from module Request To Send Clear To Send Data Terminal Ready Data Carrier Detect Ring Indicator UART 2 Data Transmission UART 2 Data Reception UART 3 Data Transmission UART 3 Data Reception RS232 CCITT N 103 104 105 106 108.2 109 125 BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 24 GM47/48 Technical description The serial channels are used as asynchronous communication links between an application system or accessory units connected to the Module. They consist of three UART's. One of them, the first and main one, shall have RS-232 functionality. The rest shall behave as general- purpose serial data lines, except for special applications (such as accessories for the UART2 and Bluetooth for UART 3). The Dig. 2.75 V CMOS Output / Input electrical characteristics shall apply, with DGND as the reference. Extra relevant data is specified for some of the signals. The only character format supported is 1 start bit, 8 bit data, non-
parity plus 1 stop bit, in total 10 bits per character. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 25 GM47/48 Technical description 3.10.1 UART 1 (RS232) - RD, TD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD and RI The UART1 signals form a 9 pin RS-232 (V.24) serial port, apart from the DSR (CCITT N 107) signal. DSR signal has been removed as it is usually connected to DTR in most systems. The signal levels do not match the standard RS-232 (V.28) levels. The relationship between the levels is shown in the table below RS - 232 Level RD, TD RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI 2.75 V CMOS Level
< - 3 V
> + 3 V 1 0 OFF ON
> 1.93
< 0.80 V Conversion between the 2.75V CMOS levels and the RS232 levels can be achieved using a standard interface IC, such as the Maxim Integrated Products MAX3237. 3.10.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD The default baud rate is 9.6 kbit/s, however higher bit rates up to 460 kbit/s shall be supported, and set by an AT command. The UART 1 starts at a rate of 9.6 kbit/s in standard AT mode or binary mode (First received data AT or binary will determine the operation mode). The GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol is supported and shall be started on command. In this case bit rates up to 460 kbits/s shall be supported. Serial Data From Module (RD) RD is an output used to send data on the UART 1 to the application system. This is a Dig. 2.75 CMOS Output and general characteristics are applicable. Parameter Application load resistance Application load capacitance Limit
< 100 kW
< 500 pF Serial Data To Module (TD) TD is input (to the module) used by the application system to send data on the UART 1 to the module. This is a Dig. 2.75 CMOS Input and general characteristics are applicable. Parameter Application driving impedance Input capacitance Input resistance (pull-up) Limit
< 100 W 1 nF 100 kW to 2.75 V BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 26 GM47/48 Technical description 3.10.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI The control signals are active low, and hence when a standard interface IC is used (such as MAX3237), then standard RS-232 levels are obtained. These signals together with DGND, RD and TD form a 9-pin RS-232 data port (with the exception of the voltage levels and DSR). RTS and CTS shall be capable of transmitting at 1/10 of the data transmission speed for data rates, up to 460 kbit/s. (Byte oriented flow control mechanism). Switching times for RTS and CTS Parameter Time from Low to High level Time from High to Low level Limit
< 2 m s
< 2 m s Request to Send (RTS) RTS is an input to the module. The signals on this circuit shall be used to condition the DCE (the module when used for data transmission purposes) for data transmission. Default level is OFF, by internal pull up. The exact behaviour of RTS shall be defined by an AT command. Software or hardware flow control can be selected. Hardware flow control is the default. This is a Dig. 2.75 CMOS Input and general characteristics are applicable. It is the duty of the application to pull RTS low (logic levels) to request communications with the module. The module will respond by asserting CTS low and as such may be used as a notification as a module status ready for communication. Parameter Application driving impedance Input capacitance Input resistance (pull-down) Limit
< 100 W
< 2 nF 100 kW to DGND BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 27 GM47/48 Technical description Clear To Send (CTS) CTS is an output from the module. The signals on this circuit shall be used to indicate that the DCE (the module when used for data transmission purposes) is ready to transmit data. Default level is high. The exact behaviour of CTS shall be defined by an AT command. Software or hardware flow control can be selected. This is a Dig. 2.75 CMOS Output and general characteristics are applicable. Tip: if only software flow control is to be used it becomes necessary to assert RTS low or to connect RTS to CTS at the module. Parameter Application load capacitance Application load resistance Limit
< 500 pF
> 1 MW Data Terminal Ready (DTR) DTR is an input to the module. Signals from the DTE on this circuit indicate the DTE is ready to transmit and receive data. DTR also acts as a hardware 'hang-up' so that calls are terminated if DTR is OFF
(high). Default level is ON (low). The exact behaviour of DTR shall be defined by AT commands. This is a Dig. 2.75 CMOS Input and general characteristics are applicable. Data Carrier Detect (DCD) DCD is an output from the module. An ON (low) signal shall indicate that a valid carrier (data signal) is being received by the DCE
(module). The exact behaviour of DCD shall be defined by an AT command. This is a Dig. 2.75 CMOS Output and general characteristics are applicable. Ring Indicator (RI) RI is an output from the module. An ON (low) signal shall indicate a ringing signal is being received by the DCE (module). The functionality shall be selected by an AT command. This is a Dig. 2.75 CMOS Output and general characteristics are applicable. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 28 GM47/48 Technical description Note: DSR is considered permanently ready for a module, therefore any DGND connection may be taken as DSR functionality. 3.10.4 UART 2 - TD2, RD2 The UART 2 consists of a full duplex serial communication. This involves the transmission and reception lines. The communication port shall work in one mode: Operation and Maintenance mode. Operation and Maintenance mode shall work in addition with SERVICE signal. On switching the module on, if SERVICE signal is active then two events can happen. If no data is sent to the module, then the logger is activated. Otherwise, the module shall be ready to be reprogrammed. Timing and Electrical signals characteristics equal to UART 1 TD and RD, except for maximum baud rate that could be increased to 921 KBPS. Transmitted Data 2 (TD2) TD2 is input (to the module) used by the application system to send data on the UART 2 to the module. The electrical characteristics shall be the same as TD. Received Data 2 (RD2) RD2 is an output used to send data on the UART 2 to the application system. The electrical characteristics shall be the same as RD. 3.10.5 UART 3 - TD3, RD3 The UART 3 consists of a full duplex serial communication. This involves the transmission and reception lines. Timing and electrical signals characteristics equal to UART 1 TD and RD. Transmitted Data 3 (TD3) TD3 is input (to the module) used by the application system to send data on the UART 3 to the module. The electrical characteristics shall be the same as TD. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 29 GM47/48 Technical description Received Data 3 (RD3) RD is an output used to send data on the UART 3 to the application system. The electrical characteristics shall be the same as RD. 3.11 SIM Card related signals Parameter Mode SIM supply Voltage High Level Input Voltage
(VIH) Low Level Input Voltage
(VIL) High Level Output Voltage
(VOH) Low Level Output Voltage
(VOL) High Level Output Voltage
(VOH) Low Level Output Voltage
(VOL) 3 V 5 V 3 V 5 V 3 V 5 V 3 V 5 V 3 V 5 V 3 V 5 V 3 V 5 V Signal SIMVCC SIMDAT SIMDAT SIMDAT SIMDAT SIMCLK SIMRST SIMCLK SIMRST Min. Typ. Max. Unit 2.7 4.5 2.1 3.5 0 0 2.7 4.7 0 0 2.4 4.4 0 0 3.0 5.0 3.3 5.5 3.0 5.0 0.9 1.5 3.0 5.0 0.2 0.2 3.0 5.0 0.35 0.3 V V V V V V V V V V V V V V BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 30 GM47/48 Technical description 3.11.1 SIM Detection SIM Presence SIMDETECT is an input intended to be used to determine whether a SIM card has been inserted or removed in the external SIM card holder. It shall be normally wired to the "Card Inserted Switch" of the external SIM card holder, but different implementation could be handled. On having High level it will mean, "SIM card missing". While pulled down to Low the module shall understand it as "SIM card inserted". SIMDETECT is Dig. 2.75 CMOS input and general characteristics are applicable. Parameter Pull-up resistance (at 2.75 V) Low Level Input Voltage (SIM inserted) High Level Input Voltage (SIM missing) Min. 100 1.93 Typ. Max. 0.8 5 Units kW V V 3.12 Service/Programming Pin 58 Signal SERVICE Description Flash programming voltage This input shall be used as a programming voltage for the Flash Memories to initiate and speed up the programming process, or a signal to indicate the module a logging process. Mode Mode Normal Operation Service/enable programming Fast programming Absolute maximum voltage SERVICE Voltage (V) SERVICE Voltage (V) Min. Typ. 2.75 1.9 11.4 Max. 0.8 3.6 12.6 13.5 Drive Capacity Drive Capacity
> 1 mA
> 60 mA
The maximum accumulated time allowed with Programming voltage applied shall be 80 h. over the lifetime of the module. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 31 GM47/48 Technical description 3.13 Buzzer Pin 31 Signal BUZZER Description Buzzer Output from module This is an output signal which allows the application to use pre-
programmed melodies or sounds. Typical use would involve a transistor buffer with a piezoelectric sounder. The Dig. 2.75 V CMOS Output electrical characteristics shall apply, with DGND as the reference. 3.14 LED Pin 33 Signal LED Description LED Output from module This is an output signal which allows the use of an external LED. The LED shall indicate different states within the module. This signal is a Dig. 2.75 V CMOS output so general characteristics are applicable. In order to connect a LED in the external application following scheme shall be followed. The operation of the LED is hardcoded and is not controlled by the host application. Figure 3.5 Electrical connection for led BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 32 GM47/48 Technical description 3.15 TX_ON - Burst Transmission Pin 35 Signal TX_ON Dir O Description GSM module on transmission The TX_ON is a digital signal output. This shall indicate that the module is going to transmit the burst. Burst transmission is the time when a GSM transceiver unit. Dig 2.75 CMOS Output so general electrical characteristics are applicable. 3.16 Timestamp Pin 32 Signal TIMESTAMP Dir O Description Global Positioning System Timestamp TIMESTAMP is a Dig. 2.75 V CMOS Output electrical characteristics, with DGND as the reference. Its main purpose is the A-GPS timestamp. As it is shown this is only applicable when the Assisted GPS is implemented. In order to apply the assisted GPS performance not only MS implementation is necessary but network side as well. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 33 GM47/48 Technical description 3.17 Real Time Clock The Real Time Clock provides with a time-of-day calendar with alarm and one hundred-year calendar to the main microprocessor. The real time clock operates with a separate power supply. Therefore, two modes of operation shall be distinguished:
RTC Normal operation: This is when the MS is powered, and it does not take into account if the MS is in OFF, ON or SLEEP mode. RTC Backup operation: This operation is performed when the MS is not powered, VCC = 0V. In this case the RTC operation is maintained by the backup power supply. The backup power supply is a passive power supply, capacitor, golden- capacitor, battery etc., which shall be connected outside the MS to VRTC pin. During the RTC normal operation, the passive power supply is being charged; this is like charging a capacitor. In backup operation, the backup source provides with enough voltage for RTC operations. Following table shows both voltage operations characteristics. Parameter Supply Voltage RTC (Normal Operation Charging the capacitance) Supply Voltage RTC (Backup Operation Capacitance provides with voltage) Min. 1.6 1.0 Typ. 1.8 1.8 Max. Units 2.0 2.0 V V In Back-up operation if the voltage drop below 1.0 Volts, the RTC shall stop working. Following picture shows the RTC connection:
Figure 3.6 RTC connection A typical value for this capacitor will be 0.16F, this will power the RTC for approximately 6 hours. BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 34 GM47/48 Technical description 4 Antenna Connector The Antenna Connector is a hub for transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signals from the module to the external customer-
supplied antenna. It is a microminiature coaxial MMCX connector that is mounted on the surface of the module. One provider of Antenna Connectors is IMS. This table provides the electrical characteristics at the antenna interface. Parameter Nominal impedance Limit 50 W
(SWR < 2:1) Description Output Power 2 Watt peak (Class 4) Extended GSM 900 Static Sensitivity 1 Watt peak (Class 1) Better than - 102 dBm Better than - 102 dBm GSM 1800 Extended GSM 900 GSM 1800 BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 35 GM47/48 Technical description 5 AT Command Summary The AT standard is a line-oriented command language. "AT" is an abbreviation of ATtention and it is always used to start sending a command line from a TE to the TA. TE stands for Terminal Equipment which is a computer of any size and TA stands for Terminal Adapter which is the modem part of the module. The command line consists of a string of alphanumeric characters. It is sent to the modem to instruct it to perform the commands specified by the characters. Functionality AT commands CONTROL AND IDENTIFICATION Subscriber Information Product & Release info Generic information & Settings CALL CONTROL AT+CNUM, AT+CIMI, AT*ESNU AT+CGMI, AT+CGMM, AT+CGMR, AT+CGSN, AT*ESIR AT, AT*, AT+CLAC, AT+GCAP, ATI, AT+CSCS, AT&F, AT&W, ATZ, AT+WS46 ATA, ATD, ATL, ATH, ATO, ATP, ATT, AT+CHUP, AT+CMOD, AT+VTS, AT+CVHU, AT+CR, AT+CRC, AT+CRLP AUDIO CONTROL AT*EALR, AT*EAMS, AT*EARS, AT*ELAM, AT*EMIR, AT*EMIC, AT*EXVC NETWORK SERVICES Alternate Line Service (ALS) Customer Service Profile Call forwarding AT*EALS, AT*ELIN, AT*ESLN AT*ECSP AT+CCFC, AT*EDIF, AT*EDIS Calling/called number identification AT+CLIP, AT+CLIR, AT*EIPS Preferred networks Advice of Charge Calling cards AT*EPNR, AT*EPNW AT+CACM, AT+CAMM, AT+CAOC, AT+CPUC AT*ESCN Call hold, waiting & multiparty AT+CCWA, AT+CHLD Operator selection Network registration USSD Security & Locks SETTINGS AT+COPS AT+CREG AT+CUSD, AT+ CSSN AT+CLCK, AT+ CPWD, AT+CPIN, AT*EPEE AT*EMAR, AT*ERIL, AT*ERIN, AT*ERIP, AT*ESIL, AT*ESMA, AT*ESMM, AT*ESOM, BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 36 GM47/48 Technical description AT*ECPI ME STATUS INFORMATION AT*ECAM, AT+CSQ, AT+CBC, AT+CIND, AT+CPAS, AT+CMER ERROR CONTROL AT+CMEE, AT+CEER SMS & CB Settings SMS-Command Read / write SMS Send SMS PHONEBOOK Read / write / find Call screening Groups Personal Rings Settings CLOCK Alarm Time & Date WAP Bookmarks Settings Profiles INTERFACE COMMANDS AT*ESTL, AT+CPMS, AT+CRES, AT+CSAS, AT+CSCA, AT+CSMS, AT+CNMI, AT+CSDH, AT+CSMP, AT+CGSMS AT+CMGC AT+CMGD, AT+CMGW, AT+CMGL, AT+CMGR AT+CMGS, AT+CMSS AT+CPBS, AT+CPBR, AT+CPBW, AT+CPBF AT*ECAR, AT*ECAS, AT*ECAW AT*EGIR, AT*ESAC, AT*ESCG, AT*ESDG, AT*ESDI, AT*ESGR AT*EPRR, AT*EPRW AT*EPBM, AT*ESIA, AT*E2PCS AT+CALA, AT+CALD, AT+CAPD AT+CCLK, AT+CTZU, AT*EDST AT*EWBA, AT*EWBR AT*EWCG, AT*EWCT, AT*EWDT, AT*EWHP, AT*EWIL, AT*EWLI, AT*EWPB, AT*ENAD, AT*EWSA, AT*EWSG AT*EWPN, AT*EWPR AT&C, AT&D, AT+ICF, AT+IFC, AT+ILRR, AT+IPR, ATE, AETM, ATQ, ATS0, ATS10, ATS2, ATS3, ATS4, ATS5, ATS6, ATS7, ATS8, ATV, ATX, AT+CSCS DATA COMPRESSION V42bis AT+DR, AT+DS 07.10 MULTIPLEXING AT+CMUX BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 37 GM47/48 Technical description HSCSD GPRS PDP Context Activation Manual PDP Context Activation GPRS Attachment Enter Data State Define PDP Context GPRS Event Reporting Show PDP Address Quality of Service Profile (MINIMUM ACCEPTABLE) AT+CHSR, AT+CHSU AT+CGACT AT+CGANS AT+CGATT AT+CGDATA AT+CGDCONT AT+CGEREP AT+CGPADDR AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (REQUESTED) AT+CGQREQ GPRS Network registration Status Extension of ATD for GPRS AT+CGREG ATD*
NETWORK INFORMATION Cell information Engineering Mode SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT Set Up Call Display Text Get Inkey Get Input Select Item Set Up Menu Envelope (Menu Selection) Application Toolkit Settings AT*E2CD AT*E2EMM AT*E2STKC AT*E2STKD AT*E2STKG AT*E2STKI AT*E2STKL AT*E2STKM AT*E2STKN AT*E2STKS BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 38 GM47/48 Technical description 6 Technical Data Mechanical specifications Maximum length:
Maximum width:
Maximum thickness:
Weight:
50 mm 33 mm 6.82 mm (without system connector pins length) 18,5 g Power supply voltage, normal operation Voltage:
Tolerance Ripple:
3.6V Nominal 0.2V
<100mV @ 200KHz, <20mV @>200KHz Voltage must always stay within a normal operating range, ripple included. Power consumption:
Speech mode < 600 mA (< 2 A peak) Idle mode: 20 mA Switched off: < 100 m A Radio specifications Frequency range:
Maximum RF output power:
Antenna impedance:
GM 47: EGSM 900 MHz and 1800 MHz (Dual Band) GM 48: GSM 850 MHz and 1900 MHz (Dual Band) 2 W / 1 W 50 W SIM card SIM card interface:
Support of external SIM card 3 V or 5 V Environmental specifications Operating temperature range:
Storage temperature range:
Maximum relative humidity:
Stationary vibration, sinusoidal:
Stationary vibration, random
-25 0C to +55 0C
-40 0C to +85 0C 95% at +40 0C Displacement: 7.5 mm Acceleration amplitude: 20 m/s 2 40 m/s 2 Frequency range: 2-8 Hz 8-200 Hz 200-500 Hz Acceleration spectral density (m 2/s2): 0.96 2.88 0.96 Frequency range: 5-10 10-200 200-500 60 min per/axis Non-stationary vibration, including shock Shock response spectrum I, peak acceleration: - 3 shocks in each axis and direction: 300 m/s 2, 11 ms BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 39 GM47/48 Technical description Bump:
Free fall transportation:
Shock response spectrum II, peak acceleration: - 3 shocks in each axis and direction: 1000 m/s 2, 6 ms Acceleration 250 m/s 2 1.2 m Rolling pitching transportation:
Static load:
Angle: 35 degrees, period: 8s 10 kPa Low air pressure/high air pressure:
70 kPa / 106 kPa Storage SMS Storage capacity 40 in ME Phone book capacity 100 In addition the unit can handle as many SMS as the SIM can store (SIM dependent). DAC Parameter Resolution Output voltage swing for Code=00HEX Output voltage swing for Code=FFHEX Nominal Step Size Linear Code Range Absolute Error during Linear Range Conversion Speed ADC Parameter Resolution Input voltage for Code=00 H Input voltage for Code=FFH Nominal Step Size Accuracy Input Impedance 0.2 0.1 Value 8 0.138 2.61 9.668 8-247 (8H-F7H) 100
<100 0.1 0.01 0.1 Value 8 0.01 2.75 10.742 3
>1 Conversion Time to within 0.5bit
<100 Units bit V V mV LSB mV m s Units bit V V mV LSB MW m s BA/SEM/MS 02:0004 Rev B 40
| 1 | Exhibit 8 Design Guidelines | Users Manual | 163.68 KiB | June 06 2002 |
GM 47/GM 48 Design Guidelines CE The product described in this manual conforms to the TTE directive 91/263/EEC and EMC directive 89/336/EEC. The product fulfils the requirements according to ETS 300 342-1. The information contained in this document is the proprietary information of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications. The contents are confidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers, employees, agents or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications, is strictly prohibited. Further, no portion of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications, the copyright holder. First edition (January 2002) Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications. publishes this manual without making any warranty as to the content contained herein. Further Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications. reserves the right to make modifications, additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors, inaccurate information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment at any time and without notice. Such changes will, nevertheless be incorporated into new editions of this manual. All rights reserved. Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications., 2002 Publication number:
Printed in UK Trademarks AIX is a trademark owned by International Business Machines Corporation GM47/48 Design Guidelines Contents 1 INTRODUCTION ...........................................................................................................5 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................5 PRECAUTIONS...........................................................................................................5 ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................................5 2 MECHANICAL INTEGRATION.......................................................................................7 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.1 4.2 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 3.3.1 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.6.1 3.6.2 PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS...............................................................................................7 ELECTRICAL INTEGRATION........................................................................................8 GENERAL.................................................................................................................8 GROUNDING .............................................................................................................9 The Analogue Ground.......................................................................................9 The Digital Ground (DGND)...............................................................................9 EXTERNAL SUPPLY TO MODULE.................................................................................10 Power Supply (VCC).......................................................................................10 GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS ..................................................................................11 SIM CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................................13 AUDIO CONNECTIONS...............................................................................................14 Analogue Audio ..............................................................................................14 Advanced Portable Hands Free Functionality...................................................15 RF AND ANTENNA INTEGRATION.................................................................................16 INTERFACING TO A 3.3V m PROCESSOR.......................................................................17 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD AND LOGGING CIRCUITRY .........................................................17 DEVELOPERS BOARD...............................................................................................18 POWER CIRCUIT......................................................................................................18 SIM CIRCUIT..........................................................................................................18 PART NUMBERS ........................................................................................................20 SYSTEM CONNECTOR ...............................................................................................20 RF CONNECTOR......................................................................................................20 SIM CARD HOLDER..................................................................................................20 SUPPLIERS.............................................................................................................20 Imperial connectors ........................................................................................20 5.4.1 5.4.2 IMS connectors ..............................................................................................21 TYPE APPROVAL.......................................................................................................22 3 4 5 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED......................................................................................22 POWER SUPPLY ......................................................................................................22 SIM TESTING..........................................................................................................23 EMC/ESD & SAFETY ..............................................................................................23 RF TESTING...........................................................................................................23 GM47.............................................................................................................23 GM48.............................................................................................................23 SAR WARNING........................................................................................................24 OTHER TA ISSUES...................................................................................................24 External Application software...........................................................................24 GM47 software updates ..................................................................................24 APPENDIX I - TECHNICAL DATA ......................................................................................25 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.6 6.7 APPENDIX II GM47/48 PIN OUT......................................................................................27 BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 3 GM47/48 Design Guidelines APPENDIX III GSM TRANSMIT WAVEFORM CHARACTERISTICS.....................................30 BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 4 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview 1.2 Precautions The GM47/48 belong to a new generation of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications GSM modules. This document describes the main characteristics and functionality of the GM 47/48, two dual band products for 900/ 1800 MHz and 850/1900 MHz GSM bands respectively. This document should be used in conjunction with either the GM 47/48 Integrators Manual or GM47/48 Technical Description and is intended to aid the system integrator both designing the module into their application and gaining the correct approvals. The GM47/48 should be handled like any mobile station. In the Integrators Manual you will find more information about safety and product care. Never exceed these limits to ensure the module is not damaged. 1.3 Abbreviations Abbreviation Explanation BT CBS CBM CSD DCE DTE DTMF EFR EMC ETSI FR GPRS GPS GSM HR HSCSD ITU-T Bluetooth Cell Broadcast Service Cell Broadcast Messaging Circuit Switch Data Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Data Terminal Equipment Dual Tone Multi Frequency Enhanced Full Rate codec Electro-Magnetic Compatibility European Telecommunications Standards Institute Full Rate codec General Packet Radio Service Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile Comunication Half Rate codec High Speed Circuit Switched Data International Telecommunication Union Telecommunications Standardisation Sector ME Mobile Equipment BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 5 GM47/48 Design Guidelines MO MS MT PCM PDU RLP RF RTC SDP SMS SIM TBD Mobile Originated Mobile Station Mobile Terminated Pulse Code Modulation Protocol Data Unit Radio Link Protocol Radio Frequency Real Time Clock Service Discovery Protocol Short Message Service Subscriber Identity Module To Be Defined BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 6 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 2 Mechanical Integration The GM 47/48 are protected with AISI 304 Stainless Steel covers suitable to fulfil the environmental and EMC requirements. Dimensions, the position of the different connectors and mounting holes are shown in figure 2.1. 2.1 Physical Dimensions Figure 2.1 Physical dimensions of GM 47/48 BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 7 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 3 Electrical Integration 3.1 General The electrical connections to the module (except the antenna), are set through the System Connector Interface. The connector shall allow the following connections: board to board and board to cable. See section 5 for suppliers and part numbers. The figure 3.1 below indicates the pin numbering scheme. Figure 3.1 GM 47/48. View from the underside BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 8 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 3.2 Grounding Pins 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 60 Name DGND AGND Description Digital Ground Analogue Ground There are two ground signals in GM 47/48, Analogue Ground (AGND) and Digital Ground (DGND). The analogue Ground is connected to pin number 60, and the Digital Ground is connected to the System Connector Interface through pin numbers 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 and 12. Note: All the Ground pins have to be connected to the application. The AGND is connected to the DGND in the ME, and only there. It is important that the AGND and the DGND are separated in the application. 3.2.1 The Analogue Ground The AGND lead is the analogue audio reference ground. It is the return signal for Audio To Mobile Station (ATMS) and Audio From Mobile Station (AFMS). It is connected to the Digital Ground (DGND) inside the module and only there. The application shall not connect DGND and AGND. Parameter Imax Limit
@ 12.5mA 3.2.2 The Digital Ground (DGND) DGND is the reference for all digital signals in the System Interface. It shall also be the DC return for the power supply on VCC and SERVICE. Each DGND pin is rated at 0.5 A. All DGND pins are connected internally in the module. Parameter Iaverage Imax Limit
< 0.5 A No DGND pin can withstand over 0.5 A
< 600 mA (100 mA each) BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 9 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 3.3 External Supply to Module Pins 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Name VCC Description Regulated Power Supply Connect all of the pins together in the application in order to carry the current drawn by the module. 3.3.1 Power Supply (VCC) The VCC supplies the module with external power. Any other voltage needed is generated internally. Parameter Voltage to be applied Mode Nominal Tolerance Limit 3.6 Volts 3.4 Volts - 4.0 Volts Maximum voltage drop during transmit burst 200mV Over voltages 5.5 Volts Current Drive capability at TX Full Power
< 600 mA (average))
< 2 A (Peak) GM 47/48 does not have internal capacitance to supply the large current peaks during GSM transmission. Therefore on burst transmission the application DC source is responsible for providing the appropriate current. Recommendations to the design of power supplies are given in the following sections.
'RLINE' represents resistance of circuit between PSU and GM47/GM48. Vcc 3.6V RLINE 100mohm L1 33uH J1 577usec 1:8 Duty Cycle V1 2 Amp
C1 220uF
CF 100uF Low ESR CBULK 1000uF Low ESR RRX 120ohm 30mA Load RTX 1.8ohm 2A Load Figure 3.2 - Simplified Power Supply Reference Model BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 10 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 3.3.2 General Recommendations The power supply conditions for the GM47/48 Vcc connection are as follows:
Maximum voltage drop during transmit burst Maximum Ripple 200mV TBD : [estimate 50mV]
Table 3.1 Recommended ESR on CBULK : <100mW Recommended Maximum DC resistance between PSU and GM47 Vcc
: <200mW Recommended minimum CBULK : 1000m F [see tables below]
The following tables provide a quick indication to recommended CBULK capacitance to maintain Vcc drop <200mV for different PSU current delivery and DC resistance between PSU and Module Vcc. PSU LIMIT 2.0 Amp 1.5 Amp 1.0 Amp 0.5 Amp PSU LIMIT 2.0 Amp 1.5 Amp 1.0 Amp 0.5 Amp PSU LIMIT 2.0 Amp 1.5 Amp 1.0 Amp 0.5 Amp CBULK ESR = 50mW RLINE = 50mW CBULK (min) 1000m F
*2500m F
*6000m F
*10000m F Table 3.2 CBULK ESR = 50mW RLINE = 100mW CBULK (min) 1500m F 4000m F
*6000m F
*10000m F Table 3.3 CBULK ESR = 50mW RLINE = 150mW CBULK (min) 4000m F 5000m F
*6000m F
*10000m F Table 3.4 Transmit Burst Vcc Dip (approx) 120mV 170mV 160mV 165mV Transmit Burst Vcc Dip (approx) 200mV 150mV 170mV 180mV Transmit Burst Vcc Dip (approx) 200mV 190mV 190mV 200mV BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 11 GM47/48 Design Guidelines PSU LIMIT 2.0 Amp 1.5 Amp 1.0 Amp 0.5 Amp CBULK ESR = 50mW RLINE = 200mW CBULK (min) 6000m F 6000m F 6000m F
*12000m F Table 3.5 Transmit Burst Vcc Dip (approx) 200mV 190mV 190mV 200mV Note: When this capacitance is used with the PSU conditions stated, the PSU will reach current limit. Although this condition on Vcc will not adversely affect the module performance, this may not be a condition appropriate to the supply and may adversely affect other devices sharing the PSU output. If the PSU cannot be driven to current limit, please select a non-current limiting configuration of CBULK and RLINE. It is the responsibility of the application developer to ensure correct operation of the PSU. Further details of the GSM burst transmission waveform are given in appendix III. 3.3.3 On/Off signal The on/off line should be attached to an open collector drive or momentary contact switch otherwise the module alarm clock feature will not operate. The on/off line is wired Red internally with the alarm wake up signal. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 12 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 3.4 SIM connections All track lengths between the SIM card and the module must be kept below 15cm. This is due to the voltage drop/capacitance associated with the extra track length and it has type approval issues as it will affect timing. This is primarily designed as a 3 Volts SIM interface, but if a 5 Volts SIM card is connected to it the interface will automatically detect this and adjust the appropriate parameters. SIM connections are shown below. Figure 3.2 SIM Connections Points to note regarding SIM connection The SIM does not need protection between it and the module, if protection is put in great care must be taken as SIM testing for type approval is very sensitive to capacitance in the lines. De-coupling for Vcc is required, testing has been carried out using a 2.2uF ceramic capacitor. It is recommended that SIM circuitry is run at the opposite end of the module as a precaution. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 13 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 3.5 Audio Connections Audio connections for both of the analogue paths are shown below. 3.5.1 Analogue Audio Pin 57 59 60 Signal AFMS ATMS AGND Dir. Description O I
Audio From Mobile Station Audio To Mobile Station Ground (return) for analogue audio ATMS and AFMS are the audio input and output for the module. Figure 3.3 shows the connection of the analogue audio signals ATMS and AFMS to the CODEC. An Advanced Portable Hands Free accessory is also shown to clarify the connections. Simplified Circuit CODEC Bias 0V or 2V or 2.5V Audio In 70K Ohms 2.7K ATMS Switch GM47 MIC Audio Out
<20 ohms AFMS 2.2u S p e a k e r AGND Figure 3.3. Analogue Audio Signal Connections. It shall be possible to use the analogue audio signals in different modes. Hands-Free - This is the state referred to as Audio To Mobile Station ATMS and Audio From Mobile Station AFMS, which BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 14 GM47/48 Design Guidelines will be used by audio accessories like handsets or Hands Free equipment. Portable Hands Free - This state activates a different amplification factor in the GM47 and activates a microphone bias level of 2V in ATMS when a call is in progress. This is the default state at power-on. Audio Circuit Electrical characteristics All sources must be AC-coupled except the Portable HandsFree microphone, which shall be DC-coupled in order to supply DC current to the Portable HandsFree microphone. AC coupling prevents incorrect biasing or damage of the ATMS input. The capacitor must have a value greater than shown below to avoid attenuation of low frequencies. Application driving impedance (0.3 3.5 kHz) AC coupling capacitance Module input impedance (0.3 3.5 kHz) Low frequency cut-off. (-3 dB) High frequency cut-off. (-3 dB) Output DC bias level 300 W 1 m F
> 50 kW 300 Hz
> 3500 0V 50 Hz 50 Hz 2.0V 0.1V Hands-Free mode Portable Hands Free Mode Additional Gain in Portable Hands Free Mode 28.5 dB Table 1. ATMS Levels. Audio Levels 3.5.2 Advanced Portable Hands Free Functionality This functionality consists in the detection of a push button press connecting ATMS to AGND for a certain period of time. This will create a change in the microphone DC bias level. Microphone bias current at 2V1 DC impedance for push button Activated2 Deactivated3
< 0.3 mA
< 100 W
> 10 kW
[TBC]
Portable Handsfree electrical data 1 Bias current >0.7mA will cause false indication of button activation (Threshold is 100mV). 2 2V x ( 100 W 3 Lower impedance will reduce bias on microphone.
)) = 71 mV. Threshold is 100mV.
/ ( 2700 W
+ 100 W BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 15 GM47/48 Design Guidelines AFMS is the analogue audio output from the module. When it is active, the output is derived from the PCM digital audio by the decoder part of the CODEC. The PCM data comes from PCMI on the system connector. It is also used as an ear-piece driver for the Portable Hands Free accessory. Zout4 (0.3 3.5 kHz) Output capacitance Levels5
(THD<5%) 120 W 2.2 m F
> 2.4 Vpp [TBC]
(0.3 3.5 kHz)
(0.3 3.5 kHz)
> 2.2 Vpp [TBC]
(at 1 kHz)
> 1.3 Vpp [TBC]
Drive capability into 5 kW Drive capability into1.5 kW Drive capability into 150 W Table 2. AFMS Levels. Audio Levels 3.6 RF and antenna Integration The rules for RF and antenna integration are general good practice guidelines i.e. Ensure the antenna is a good 50W match across the GSM 900/1800 bands for GM47 and GSM 850/1900 bands for GM48. Antenna installation should be, where possible, not close to large metal objects as this will affect the matching mentioned above. A specifically designed antenna for the GSM signals being operated at will ensure the best reception. If these are followed there should be no issues in terms of RF. Please also see section 6.6 regarding SAR. 4 Output impedance includes impedance of EMC filter which is 100 W 5 Need to check output drive levels with 100R EMI filter. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 16
GM47/48 Design Guidelines 3.7 Interfacing to a 3.3V mProcessor Although the inputs to the modules can withstand a certain degree of over voltage they should not be purposefully driven at a higher voltage than that quoted in the pin out in appendix II. This particularly applies to the serial com ports used to send and receive the commands to and from the module. Level shifting I/Cs are required to interface to the module. An example of a suitable device is a Max3372 for level shifting, please follow the below link for the data sheet. Note : ESD protection is not a requirement for the level shifter. http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/arpdf/MAX3372E-MAX3393E.pdf 3.8 Software download and logging circuitry Below the circuitry is shown which allows software download and logging to be performed. VCC 3V6 1,3,5,7,9,11 SERVICE VIO 2V7 CTMS CFMS ON/OFF 0.1uF
0.1uF 58 34 45 46 14 R O T C E N N O C M E T S Y S 7 4 M G 0.1uF 20 VCC R1IN T1OUT 15 17 R2IN 14 C2+
4
C2-
5 0.1uF 12 Fon 19 Foff 13 VL 11 R1OUT E 0 8 3 3 X A M 8 9 1 3 T1IN T2IN C1+
C1-
V+
2
GND V-
18 6 TD RD 3 2 5 DTE 9 pin D-Type 2,4,6,8,10,12 0.1uF
0.1uF The data sheet for the Maxim device can be found at http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/arpdf/MAX3380E-MAX3381E.pdf BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 17 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 4 Developers Board The developers board is the reference design against which the module has been type approved, the circuit diagram for this is available upon request from customer support 4.1 Power Circuit 4.2 SIM Circuit A 3A simple switcher step down voltage regulator has been used to produce the module Vcc. Two 6800m F capacitors are located adjacent to the module to cope with the GSM current pulses. The capacitors are low ESR type approximately 16mW
. The SIM holder has been connected directly to the module, the SIMVCC decoupling capacitor has been omitted and should be present for all designs. Note: Provision was made for additional ESD protection on the board for development purposes. This is not required and the devices have been removed from the SIMDATA and SIMCLK signals to minimise capacitance on these lines. 4.3 On/Off switch The on/off line is connected to a momentary contact switch, this ensures correct operation of the alarm clock feature in the module. 4.4 Programming circuitry The data lines are converted between 2.7V & 5V logic and then between 5V & RS232 levels. The data signal into the module is powered from the VIO supply interface which ensures isolation of the signal when the module is off. To invoke programming mode the jumper JP27 is used. The Vppflash signal path is no longer used. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 18 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 4.5 EMC 4.6 Data signals:
The circuit ground is bonded to the metal chassis of the developers kit box, all signal connections are filtered via ferrite chokes. The data and handshake lines are converted between 2.7V & 5V logic and then between 5V & RS232 levels. The data signal and handshake lines into the module are powered from the VIO supply interface which ensures isolation of the signal when the module is off. Diodes D3-5,D7 & D8 are not fitted. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 19 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 5 Part numbers 5.1 System connector A connector that can be used to interface to the system connector is the Samtech FLE or SFMC or CLP series, the female part number is CLP-
130-02-F-D. This connector or an equivalent can be sourced from imperial connectors below, again this company is just an example of one supplier. 5.2 RF connector MMCX is a standard RF connector and should be able to be sourced from most suppliers. 5.3 SIM card holder The data sheet for the SIM holder that is used on the developers board is available on request from customer support. The card holder is a lockable type as problems have been experienced in the past with the slide in holders. 5.4 Suppliers Below are listed suppliers of connectors which SonyEricsson uses, the quality or availability of components cannot be guaranteed. 5.4.1 Imperial connectors Imperial connectors have a good selection of SIM holders, the MMCX RF connector and the system connector. SIM card reader For the SIM card reader follow the link http://www.imperial-connect.co.uk/products/sim.html BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 20 GM47/48 Design Guidelines System connector For the system connector follow http://www.imperial-connect.co.uk/products/prodprofile127.html click on ITRQPGA thumbnail. 5.4.2 IMS connectors Connector cables from MMCX to SMA can be ordered from this supplier normally with a 2-3 week lead time. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 21 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 6 Type Approval The system integrator has to get CE marking for the integrated solution with the GSM module in Europe (GM47) and the FCC approval in the US (GM48). The system integrator only has to show compliance with the essential requirements of the module by the integration of it into the application. If the external elements are designed according to the guidelines of this document the testing would be the following:
Integration with GM47 EMC in all modes of operation Safety Integration with the GM48 FCC approvals of all applicable parts Sony Ericsson recommends that all these tests are performed by the customer in an accredited test house. After that, all documentation together with the test reports and certificates of the application should be sent to Sony Ericsson in order to register the application to the accessories list for the approval of the module, this will aid the approval of the application world wide. 6.1 Documentation required The system integrator is required to produce a document which will be submitted to the test house containing the following information. Summary of the application Hardware description Block diagram with an explanation Schematics PCB/Component layout Bill of materials This documentation will also be required for Sony Ericsson to add the application to the list of approved accessories for the module in addition to the test reports and certificates obtained from the test house. 6.2 Power supply It is essential the application power supply is designed to comply with the specification in section 3. This will be sufficient to pass type approval, no RF testing will be required if it meets these specifications. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 22 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 6.3 SIM Testing SIM testing does not need to be carried out since it is a passive component. Points to note regarding the implementation of the SIM card holder are as follows. SIM presence must be implemented to comply with the module Any manufacturers SIM card holder can be used and this can also approval conditions. be either 6 or 8 pins. 6.4 EMC/ESD & Safety EMC and safety tests according to the ITU/GSM and FCC standards will have to be completed as part of the mandatory testing. The GM 47/48 were originally type approved outside of a metal box. Additional shielding is not strictly required the external application. This is the responsibility of the system integrator. Overall ESD protection should be guaranteed by the system integrator. The EMC standard which the application must be tested to is EN 301 489-7, this can be found at the following web site. http://www.etsi.org/getastandard/home.htm The safety standard which the application must be tested to is EN 60950, the can be found at the following web site http://www.iec.ch/
For the GM48 FCC part 15 regulations, these can be found at http://www.fcc.gov/
6.5 RF Testing 6.5.1 GM47 6.5.2 GM48 As long as the antenna connected to the module is of the correct impedance as specified in section 3.7 and is passive further RF testing for TA is not required. Although it should be noted that radiation performance is the responsibility of the system integrator. According to the US rules (GM48) any change in RF path i.e. the antenna path will require new approval according to FCC part 22 and 24. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 23 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 6.6 SAR warning If the application is using an antenna which is less than 20cm away from the any part of the users body, integrators are legally obliged to publish SAR figures for the product. This testing would need to be carried out by the system integrator. Even if SAR measurements are not required it is considered good practice to insert a warning in any manual produced indicating it is a radio product and that care should be taken. 6.7 Other TA issues 6.7.1 External Application software If the software of the external application is changed it has no effect upon the type approval certificate issued to it. 6.7.2 GM47 software updates If the GM47 software is updated there should be no further action required by the system integrator as accessories lists are generally carried across between TA certificates and any software supplied by Sony Ericsson will be fully Type Approved. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 24 GM47/48 Design Guidelines Appendix I - Technical Data Mechanical specifications Maximum length:
Maximum width:
Maximum thickness:
Weight:
50 mm 33 mm 6.82 mm (without system connector pins length) 18,5 g Power supply voltage, normal operation Voltage:
Tolerance Ripple:
3.6V Nominal 0.2V
<100mV @ 200KHz, <20mV @>200KHz Voltage must always stay within a normal operating range, ripple included. Power consumption:
Speech mode < 600 mA (< 2 A peak) Idle mode: 5 mA Switched off: < 100 m A Radio specifications Frequency range:
Maximum RF output power:
Antenna impedance:
GM 47: EGSM 900 MHz and 1800 MHz (Dual Band) GM 48: GSM 850 MHz and 1900 MHz (Dual Band) 2 W / 1 W 50 W SIM card SIM card interface:
Support of external SIM card 3 V or 5 V Environmental specifications Operating temperature range:
Storage temperature range:
Maximum relative humidity:
Stationary vibration, sinusoidal:
Stationary vibration, random
-25 0C to +55 0C
-40 0C to +85 0C 95% at +40 0C Displacement: 7.5 mm Acceleration amplitude: 20 m/s2 40 m/s2 Frequency range: 2-8 Hz 8-200 Hz 200-500 Hz Acceleration spectral density (m2/s2): 0.96 2.88 0.96 Frequency range: 5-10 10-200 200-500 60 min per/axis Non-stationary vibration, including shock Shock response spectrum I, peak acceleration: - 3 shocks in each axis and direction: 300 m/s2, 11 ms BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 25 GM47/48 Design Guidelines Shock response spectrum II, peak acceleration: - 3 shocks in each axis and direction: 1000 m/s2, 6 ms Bump:
Acceleration 250 m/s2 Free fall transportation:
1.2 m Rolling pitching transportation:
Static load:
Angle: 35 degrees, period: 8s 10 kPa Low air pressure/high air pressure:
70 kPa / 106 kPa Storage SMS Storage capacity Phone book capacity DAC Parameter Resolution Output voltage swing for Code=00HEX Output voltage swing for Code=FFHEX Nominal Step Size Linear Code Range Absolute Error during Linear Range Conversion Speed ADC Parameter Resolution Input voltage for Code=00 H Input voltage for Code=FFH Nominal Step Size Accuracy Input Impedance 40 in ME Upto 25 on SIM (SIM dependent) 100 Value 0.2 0.1 8 0.138 2.61 9.668 8-247 (8H-F7H) 100
<100 0.1 Value 0.01 0.1 8 0.01 2.75 10.742 3
>1 Conversion Time to within 0.5bit
<100 Units bit V V mV LSB mV m s Units bit V V mV LSB MW m s BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 26 GM47/48 Design Guidelines Appendix II GM47/48 Pin out Pin Signal Name Dir Signal Type Description 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND
Supply
Supply
Supply
Supply
Supply
Supply
Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground Power Supply Digital Ground 13. Reserved for future use 14. ON/OFF 15. SIMVCC I
Internal pull up, open drain Turns the module on/off Former WAKE_B Dig. 3/5 V SIM card power supply 16. SIMPRESENCE I Internal pull up, open drain Power output for SIM Card from module SIM Presence A "1" shall indicate that the SIM is missing;
a "0" that it is inserted. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. SIMRST SIMDATA SIMCLK DAC IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 VRTC ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 SDA 30. SCL 31. BUZZER O I/O O O I/O I/O I/O I/O I I I I I/O O O Dig. 3/5 V Dig. 3/5 V Dig. 3/5 V SIM card reset SIM card data SIM card clock Analogue Digital, 2.75 Digital to Analogue converter General purpose input/output 1 Digital, 2.75 General purpose input/output 2 Digital, 2.75 General purpose input/output 3 Digital, 2.75 General purpose input/output 4 Supply 1.5 V Analogue Voltage for real time clock Analogue to Digital converter 1 Analogue Analogue 2.75, internal pullup 2.75, internal pullup Analogue to Digital converter 2 Analogue to Digital converter 3 I2C Data I2C Clock Dig. 2.75 Buzzer output from module BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 27 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 32. TIMESTAMP O Dig. 2.75 Timestamp 33. 34. LED VIO 35. TX_ON 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. RI DTR DCD RTS CTS TD 42. RD 43. TD3 Timestamp is reserved for future use, if A-
GPS is implemented on network side. Dig. 2.75 Flashing LED Power Out 2.75 Module powered indication. The VIO is a 2.75 V output that could power external devices to transmit data towards the GSM device to a 75mA max. This output shall indicate when the GSM module is going to transmit the burst. Ring Indicator Data Terminal Ready Data Carrier Detect Request To Send Clear To Send Transmitted Data Dig 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module).
[former DTMS]
Dig. 2.75 Received Data Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host).
[former DFMS]
Dig. 2.75 UART3 Transmission O O O O I O I O I O I 44. RD3 O Dig. 2.75 Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module).
[former DTMS]
UART3 Reception Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module).
[former DTMS]
Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host).
[former DFMS]
45. TD2 46. RD2 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. PCMULD PCMDLD PCMO PCMI PCMSYNC PCMCLK 53. MICP 54. MICN 55. BEARP I O I O O I O O I I O Dig. 2.75 UART2 Reception Former CTMS. Used for flashing Dig. 2.75 UART2 Transmission Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host).
[former DFMS]
Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Dig. 2.75 Analogue Analogue Analogue Former CFMS. Used for flashing DSP PCM digital audio input DSP PCM digital audio output Codec PCM digital audio output Codec PCM digital audio input DSP PCM frame sync DSP PCM clock output Microphone input positive Microphone input negative Speaker output positive BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 28 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 56. 57. 58. BEARN AFMS SERVICE 59. 60. ATMS AGND O O I I
Analogue Analogue 12V/2.7V Analogue
Speaker output negative Audio output from module Flash programming voltage for the MS. Enable logger information if no flashing Former VPPFLASH Audio input to module Analogue ground BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 29 GM47/48 Design Guidelines Appendix III GSM transmit waveform characteristics The simplified GSM loading characteristics and power supply reference model in relation to the GM47 system connector is represented in figure 1. J1 represents the interface to the GM47 system connector and the voltage there is referenced Vcc. Figure 2 shows a 1:8 cycle with the receive burst occurring in timeslot 1 and transmit in timeslot 6. Some of the quiet period is used by the module to listen to other GSM base-stations. In simple terms the module can draw up to 2 Amps during the transmit burst. The receive burst can draw up to 100mA. As the current consumption of the receive burst does not normally cause problems for power supply current drain, the simplified PSU model in figure 1 combines the receive, monitor and idle frames into an average current consumption around 30mA. The transmit burst requires special attention. 4.6 ms 577 m s Receive Transmit Monitor Receive 1 2 3 5 4 Figure 1 - Simplified GSM Timing Diagram 6 7 8 1 2 timeslot There are three main areas to consider in order to meet the transmit burst requirements: PSU current capability, resistance between the supply and module (RLINE), and bulk capacitance (CBULK) at the module Vcc connection. The effect that each of these parameters has on the waveform shape at Vcc is indicated in figure 3. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 30 GM47/48 Design Guidelines 577 m s TRANSMIT A B E C D F G GM47 Vcc Figure 2 - Transmit Burst Vcc Waveform A. The sharp fall in voltage in this region is caused by the ESR of the capacitors (mounted as close to the module Vcc pins as possible. B. The RC discharge is controlled by CBULK, RLINE, and RTX. C. If the PSU cannot supply the 2A max load of the GM47 and current limit is reached the discharge of CBULK goes linear. If current limit is not reached then section B will continue for the length of the transmit burst. Current limit will be reached when the voltage dropped across RLINE reaches V = ILIM *
RLINE. D. The sharp fall in voltage in this region is again caused by the ESR of the capacitors. E. CBULK will charge linearly while the supply is in current limit. This section is not relevant while the PSU is not current limited. F. The RC charge is controlled by CBULK and RLINE. G. Once the transmit burst is finished, the 1:8 duty cycle should ensure that there is sufficient time for the PSU to fully recover before the next transmit burst. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PA1 31
| 1 | Exhibit 8 Integrators Manual | Users Manual | 2.34 MiB | July 06 2002 |
GM47/GM48 Product Photo/Illustration The product described in this manual conforms to the TTE directive 91/263/EEC and EMC directive 89/336/EEC. The product fulfils the requirements according to ETS 300 342-1. SAR statement: This product is intended to be used with the antenna or other radiating element at least 20cm away from any part of the human body. The information contained in this document is the proprietary information of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International. The contents are confidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers, employees, agents or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, is strictly prohibited. Further, no portion of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the prior written consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, the copyright holder. First edition (April 2002) Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International publishes this manual without making any warranty as to the content contained herein. Further Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International reserves the right to make modifications, additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors, inaccurate information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment at any time and without notice. Such changes will, nevertheless be incorporated into new editions of this manual. All rights reserved. Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, 2002 Publication number: LZT 123 7263 R1A Printed in UK Trademarks AIX is a trademark owned by International Business Machines Corporation. Contents Part 1: Overview................................................................................................. 11 1. Introduction............................................................................................................ 13
......................................................................................... 13 1.1 1.2
......................................................................................... 13 1.3 Manual Structure ......................................................................................... 13 Target Users Prerequisites 2.1 2.2 2.3 2. GM47/GM48 Modules ........................................................................................... 15 About the GM47/GM48 Family .................................................................. 15 GM47 in a Communication System............................................................. 15 Features
......................................................................................... 17 Types of Mobile Station .................................................................. 17 2.3.1 Short Message Service .................................................................... 18 2.3.2 2.3.3 Voice Calls ...................................................................................... 18 Data................................................................................................. 18 2.3.4 SIM Card......................................................................................... 19 2.3.5 2.3.6 Average Power Consumption ......................................................... 19 2.3.7 Other Features ................................................................................ 19 Service and Support ..................................................................................... 19 2.4.1 Web Pages....................................................................................... 19 2.4.2 Integrators Manual........................................................................ 19 Developers Kit ............................................................................... 20 2.4.3 Precautions
......................................................................................... 20 2.5 2.4 3. Abbreviations ......................................................................................................... 21 Part 2: Developers Kit ....................................................................................... 23 1. Introduction............................................................................................................ 25 Overview 1.1
......................................................................................... 25 1.2 Contents of the Kit ....................................................................................... 25 General Functioning of the Kit .................................................................... 26 1.3 2. Using the Developers Kit...................................................................................... 29 Start up Check List....................................................................................... 30 Developers Board Overlay.......................................................................... 31 Jumpers, Switches and Connectors .............................................................. 32 System Connector Pin Assignments ............................................................ 36 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Part 3: Integrating the Module............................................................................ 37 1. Mechanical Description ......................................................................................... 39 Interface Description.................................................................................... 39 Physical Dimensions .................................................................................... 40 1.1 1.2 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.6 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.7 2.8 2.1 2.2 2. System Connector Interface ..................................................................................41 Overview
.......................................................................................... 41 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics ............................................ 44 General Protection Requirements ...................................................44 2.2.1 Grounds
.......................................................................................... 45 Analogue Ground - AGND ..............................................................45 2.3.1 2.3.2 Digital Ground - DGND..................................................................45 VCC - Regulated Power Supply Input ......................................................... 45 ON/OFF and External Power Signal ............................................................ 46 Switching the module ON and OFF ................................................46 2.5.1 2.5.2 VIO - 2.75V Supply..........................................................................47 Analogue Audio .......................................................................................... 48 2.6.1 Audio To Mobile Station - ATMS ....................................................48 2.6.2 Audio From Mobile Station - AFMS ...............................................49 2.6.3 Microphone Signals.........................................................................50 2.6.4 Speaker Signals ...............................................................................51 Digital Audio
.......................................................................................... 52 Serial Data Interfaces.................................................................................... 53 UART1 (RS232) - RD, TD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD and RI..............53 2.8.1 2.8.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD ..........................................................54 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI ...................................54 2.8.3 UART2 - TD2, RD2 .........................................................................56 2.8.4 2.8.5 UART3 - TD3, RD3 .........................................................................57 SIM Card Related Signals ............................................................................ 57 2.9.1 SIM Detection - SIMPRESENCE ....................................................58 2.10 Service/Programming ................................................................................... 59 2.11 Buzzer
.......................................................................................... 59 2.12 LED
.......................................................................................... 59 2.13 General Purpose Digital I/O Ports ................................................................ 60 2.14 General Purpose Analogue I/O Ports............................................................ 61 2.14.1 Digital to Analogue Converter - DAC.............................................61 2.14.2 Analogue to Digital Converters 1, 2 and 3 - ADCx ........................62 2.15 External I 2C Serial Control Bus .................................................................. 63 2.16 TX_ON - Burst Transmission....................................................................... 63 2.17 Real Time Clock .......................................................................................... 64 2.9 3. Antenna Connector ................................................................................................65 4.1 4. Hints for Integrating the Module..........................................................................67 Safety Advice and Precautions ..................................................................... 67 General............................................................................................67 4.1.1 4.1.2 SIM Card .........................................................................................67 4.1.3 Antenna............................................................................................68 Installation of the Module............................................................................. 68 4.2.1 Where to Install the Module ............................................................68 How to Install the Module ...............................................................69 4.2.2 Antenna
.......................................................................................... 70 General............................................................................................70 4.3.1 4.2 4.3 4 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 Antenna Type .................................................................................. 71 Antenna Placement ......................................................................... 71 The Antenna Cable.......................................................................... 71 Possible Communication Disturbances .......................................... 72 5. Technical Data........................................................................................................ 73 Part 4: Using AT Commands.............................................................................. 75 1. Introduction to AT Commands ............................................................................ 77 Overview 1.1
......................................................................................... 77 Syntax Description ....................................................................................... 77 1.2 1.2.1 Conventions..................................................................................... 77 AT Command Syntax....................................................................... 78 1.2.2 AT Response Syntax ........................................................................ 79 1.2.3 Error Codes
......................................................................................... 81
+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)........................... 81 1.3.1 1.3.2
+CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) ................ 82 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands ............................................ 83 1.3 1.4 AT+CPIN ATA ATD ATH ATL ATO ATP ATT ATX 2. Call Control ............................................................................................................ 85 PIN Control...................................................................... 85 Answer Incoming Call..................................................... 85 Dial .................................................................................. 86 Hang up............................................................................ 88 Monitor Speaker Loudness.............................................. 88 Return to Online Data Mode............................................ 89 Select Pulse Dialling........................................................ 89 Select Tone Dialling ........................................................ 89 Call Progress Monitoring Control ................................... 90 Hang up Call .................................................................... 90 Call Mode ........................................................................ 91 Voice Hang-Up................................................................ 92 DTMF and Tone Generation ........................................... 92 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 AT+CHUP 2.11 AT+CMOD 2.12 AT+CVHU 2.13 AT+VTS 3. Control and Status ................................................................................................. 95 Result Code Suppression ................................................. 95 Automatic Answer Control.............................................. 95 Escape Sequence Character ............................................. 96 Command Line Termination Character ........................... 96 Response Formatting Character....................................... 97 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)........ 98 Blind Dial Delay Control................................................. 98 Connection Completion Timeout .................................... 99 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control.............................. 99 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control............................ 100 Ericsson Call Monitoring............................................... 100 ATQ 3.1 ATS0 3.2 ATS2 3.3 ATS3 3.4 ATS4 3.5 ATS5 3.6 ATS6 3.7 ATS7 3.8 ATS8 3.9 3.10 ATS10 3.11 AT*ECAM LZT 123 7263 R1A 5 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 3.12 AT*EDST 3.13 AT*EMAR 3.14 AT*EPEE 3.15 AT*ESMM 3.16 AT+CALA 3.17 AT+CALD 3.18 AT+CAPD 3.19 AT+CCLK 3.20 AT+CEER 3.21 AT+CFUN 3.22 AT+CIND 3.23 AT+CLAC 3.24 AT+CMEE 3.25 AT+CMER 3.26 AT+CPAS 3.27 AT+CPIN 3.28 AT+CPWD 3.29 AT+CR 3.30 AT+CRC 3.31 AT+CSAS 3.32 AT+CSQ 3.33 AT+CTZU Ericsson Daylight Saving Time ..................................... 102 Ericsson Master Reset .................................................... 103 Ericsson Pin Event ......................................................... 103 Ericsson Settings Minute Minder................................... 104 Set Alarm ....................................................................... 104 Alarm Delete .................................................................. 105 Postpone or Dismiss an Alarm....................................... 105 Set Clock and Date......................................................... 106 Extended Error Report ................................................... 106 Set Phone Functionality ................................................. 107 Indicator Control ............................................................ 108 List all available AT Commands.................................... 109 Mobile Equipment Error ................................................ 109 Mobile Equipment Event Reporting .............................. 110 Phone Activity Status ..................................................... 111 PIN Control .................................................................... 113 Change Password ........................................................... 115 Service Reporting Control.............................................. 117 Cellular Result Code ...................................................... 117 Save Settings .................................................................. 118 Signal Strength ............................................................... 118 Automatic Time Zone Update........................................ 119 4. Audio......................................................................................................................121 Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification ................... 121 M2M Audio Profile Manipulation ................................. 127 Ericsson Audio Line Request......................................... 129 Ericsson Audio Mode Selection..................................... 130 Ericsson Audio Ring Signal ........................................... 132 Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable....................... 133 Ericsson Local Audio Mode........................................... 133 Ericsson Microphone Mode ........................................... 134 Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request ...................... 134 Ericsson Personal Ring Type Read ................................ 136 Ericsson Personal Ringtype Write ................................. 137 Ericsson Ring Level Set ................................................. 139 Ericsson Ring Set ........................................................... 140 Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command..................... 141 Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound ................................ 142 Ericsson Settings Own Melody ...................................... 142 Ericsson SET External Volume Control ........................ 144 Monitor Speaker Control................................................ 145 AT*E2EAMS 4.1 AT*E2APR 4.2 AT*EALR 4.3 AT*EAMS 4.4 AT*EARS 4.5 AT*E2PHFB 4.6 AT*ELAM 4.7 AT*EMIC 4.8 4.9 AT*EMIR 4.10 AT*EPRR 4.11 AT*EPRW 4.12 AT*ERIL 4.13 AT*ERIN 4.14 AT*ERIP 4.15 AT*ESMA 4.16 AT*ESOM 4.17 AT*EXVC 4.18 ATM 5. Data - CSD/HSCSD ..............................................................................................147 Select Bearer Service Type ............................................ 147 Radio Link Protocol ....................................................... 149 AT+CBST AT+CRLP 5.1 5.2 6. Data - GPRS..........................................................................................................151 6 LZT 123 7263 R1A PDP Context Activate or Deactivate ............................. 151 AT+CGACT 6.1 GPRS Attach or Detach ................................................. 152 AT+CGATT 6.2 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State ............................................................. 153 6.3 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context ...................................................... 154 6.4 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting .................................................. 156 6.5 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address........................................................ 157 6.6 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) ....... 158 6.7 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested).......................... 160 6.8 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status ............................... 163 6.9 Select Service for MO SMS Messages.......................... 164 6.10 AT+CGSMS 7. Data - HSCSD....................................................................................................... 165 HSCSD Current Call Parameters................................... 165 HSCSD Device Parameters ........................................... 166 HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration ............... 167 HSCSD Parameters Report............................................ 169 HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading................ 170 AT+CHSC AT+CHSD AT+CHSN AT+CHSR AT+CHSU 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 8. Data - WAP........................................................................................................... 171 Ericsson WAP Bookmark Add...................................... 171 Ericsson WAP Bookmark Read..................................... 172 Ericsson WAP CSD Gateway........................................ 173 Ericsson WAP Connection Timeout.............................. 174 Ericsson WAP Download Timeout ............................... 174 Ericsson WAP Homepage ............................................. 175 Ericsson WAP Image Load ........................................... 175 Ericsson WAP Login ..................................................... 176 Ericsson WAP Push Access Setting .............................. 177 Ericsson WAP Preferred Bearer .................................... 177 Ericsson WAP Profile Name ......................................... 178 Ericsson WAP Profile.................................................... 179 AT*EWBA 8.1 AT*EWBR 8.2 AT*EWCG 8.3 AT*EWCT 8.4 AT*EWDT 8.5 AT*EWHP 8.6 AT*EWIL 8.7 AT*EWLI 8.8 8.9 AT*EWPA 8.10 AT*EWPB 8.11 AT*EWPN 8.12 AT*EWPR 9. GPS Interoperability ........................................................................................... 181 AT*EENMEA NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2 ................................... 181 AT*E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate.................. 182 9.1 9.2 10. Internet.................................................................................................................. 185 Ericsson Internet Account Define.................................. 185 10.1 AT*ENAD 11. Identification ........................................................................................................ 189 Attention Command....................................................... 189 Set to Factory Defined Configuration............................ 189 Store User Profile .......................................................... 190 List all Supported AT Commands ................................. 190 Read MS System Interface Release............................... 190 Read MS Manufacturer Identification ........................... 191 Read MS Model Identification ...................................... 191 Read MS Revision Identification................................... 192 11.1 AT 11.2 AT&F 11.3 AT&W 11.4 AT*
11.5 AT*ESIR 11.6 AT+CGMI 11.7 AT+CGMM 11.8 AT+CGMR LZT 123 7263 R1A 7 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 11.9 AT+CGSN 11.10 AT+GMI 11.11 AT+GMM 11.12 AT+GMR 11.13 ATI Read MS Product Serial Number Identification ............ 192 Read Manufacturer Identification .................................. 193 Read Model Identification.............................................. 193 Read Revision Identification.......................................... 194 Identification Information .............................................. 194 12. Input/Output.........................................................................................................195 Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write....................... 195 12.1 AT*E2IO 13. Interface ................................................................................................................197 PIN Control .................................................................... 197 Circuit 109 (DCD) Control ............................................ 197 Circuit 108 (DTR) Response.......................................... 197 Mode Selection............................................................... 198 Command Echo .............................................................. 198 DCE Response Format ................................................... 199 Reset to Default Configuration ...................................... 200 Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol ............................... 201 Restore Settings.............................................................. 203 Cable Interface Character Format .................................. 204 DTE-DCE Local Flow Control ...................................... 205 Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting............................ 205 Cable Interface Port Command ...................................... 206 M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time.............................. 207 13.1 AT+CPIN 13.2 AT&C 13.3 AT&D 13.4 AT+WS46 13.5 ATE 13.6 ATV 13.7 ATZ 13.8 AT+CMUX 13.9 AT+CRES 13.10 AT+ICF 13.11 AT+IFC 13.12 AT+ILRR 13.13 AT+IPR 13.14 AT*E2ESC 14. Network .................................................................................................................209 14.1 AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description..................................... 209 14.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode.............. 211 M2M Service Provider Indication.................................. 217 14.3 AT*E2SPN Ericsson Request ALS Status......................................... 217 14.4 AT*EALS 14.5 AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile................................. 218 Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network.......................... 219 14.6 AT*EPNR Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network ......................... 220 14.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number ............................... 221 14.8 AT*E2SSN 14.9 AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name ................................................. 222 Subscriber Identification ................................................ 223 14.10 AT+CIMI Facility Lock .................................................................. 223 14.11 AT+CLCK 14.12 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number......................................................... 225 Operator Selection.......................................................... 227 14.13 AT+COPS 14.14 AT+CREG Network Registration ..................................................... 228 15. Phonebook.............................................................................................................229 Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum ......................... 229 Ericsson Add to Group................................................... 229 Ericsson Create Group ................................................... 230 Ericsson Set Credit Card Number .................................. 231 Ericsson Delete Group ................................................... 233 Ericsson Delete Group Item ........................................... 233 15.1 AT*E2PBCS 15.2 AT*ESAG 15.3 AT*ESCG 15.4 AT*ESCN 15.5 AT*ESDG 15.6 AT*ESDI 8 LZT 123 7263 R1A 15.7 AT*ESGR 15.8 AT*ESIL 15.9 AT*ESNU 15.10 AT+CPBF 15.11 AT+CPBR 15.12 AT+CPBS 15.13 AT+CPBW Ericsson Group Read ..................................................... 234 Ericsson Silence Command ........................................... 234 Ericsson Settings Number.............................................. 235 Phonebook Find ............................................................. 236 Phonebook Read ............................................................ 236 Phone Storage ................................................................ 238 Phonebook Write ........................................................... 239 16. Short Message Services - Point to Point............................................................. 241 PIN Control.................................................................... 241 Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound ................................ 241 Select Service for MO SMS Messages.......................... 241 Service Centre Address.................................................. 241 Message Format............................................................. 242 Write Message to Memory ............................................ 243 Send Message ................................................................ 245 Send From Storage ........................................................ 248 Send Command.............................................................. 249 Preferred Message Storage ............................................ 252 New Message Indications to TE.................................... 253 Read Message ................................................................ 257 List Message .................................................................. 263 Delete Message.............................................................. 266 Show Text Mode Parameters......................................... 267 Set Text Mode Parameters............................................. 267 Select Character Set....................................................... 268 Ericsson SMS Template List Edit.................................. 269 Select Message Service.................................................. 270 16.1 AT+CPIN 16.2 AT*ESMA 16.3 AT+CGSMS 16.4 AT+CSCA 16.5 AT+CMGF 16.6 AT+CMGW 16.7 AT+CMGS 16.8 AT+CMSS 16.9 AT+CMGC 16.10 AT+CPMS 16.11 AT+CNMI 16.12 AT+CMGR 16.13 AT+CMGL 16.14 AT+CMGD 16.15 AT+CSDH 16.16 AT+CSMP 16.17 AT+CSCS 16.18 AT*ESTL 16.19 AT+CSMS 17. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast ........................................................... 273 New Message Indications to TE.................................... 273 Select Cell Broadcast Message Type............................. 273 17.1 AT+CNMI 17.2 AT+CSCB 18. SIM Application Toolkit...................................................................................... 275 PIN Control.................................................................... 275 18.1 AT+CPIN 18.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings.................................. 275 18.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text................................................ 276 18.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey..................................................... 277 18.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input ..................................................... 278 18.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item................................................... 280 18.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu ............................................... 281 18.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)......................... 283 18.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call .................................................. 283 19. Supplementary Services ...................................................................................... 285 PIN Control.................................................................... 285 Accumulated Call Meter................................................ 285 Accumulated Call Meter Maximum .............................. 286 19.1 AT+CPIN 19.2 AT+CACM 19.3 AT+CAMM LZT 123 7263 R1A 9 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 19.4 AT+CAOC 19.5 AT+CPUC 19.6 AT*EDIF 19.7 AT*EIPS 19.8 AT*ELIN 19.9 AT+CCFC 19.10 AT+CCWA 19.11 AT+CHLD 19.12 AT+CLIP 19.13 AT+CLIR 19.14 AT+CSSN 19.15 AT+CUSD Advice of Charge ........................................................... 287 Price Per Unit and Currency Table ................................ 288 Ericsson Divert Function................................................ 289 Identity Presentation Set ................................................ 290 Ericsson Line Set............................................................ 291 Call Forwarding number and Conditions....................... 291 Call Waiting ................................................................... 294 Call Hold and Multiparty ............................................... 296 Calling Line Identification ............................................. 297 Calling Line Identification Restriction........................... 299 Supplementary Service Notification .............................. 300 Unstructured Supplementary Service Data .................... 302 20. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands..............................................................305 10 LZT 123 7263 R1A Part 1: Overview Product Photo/Illustration 1. Introduction 1.1 Target Users 1.2 Prerequisites GM47 and GM48 modules are designed to be integrated into machine-
to-machine or man-to-machine communications applications. They are intended to be used by to manufacturers, system integrators, applications developers and developers of wireless communications equipment. It is assumed that the person integrating the GM47 or GM48 into an application has a basic understanding of the following:
GSM networking;
Wireless communication and antennas (aerials);
AT commands;
ITU-T standard V.24/V.28;
Micro controllers and programming;
Electronic hardware design. 1.3 Manual Structure The manual is composed of four parts:
Part 1- Overview This section provides a broad overview of the GM47/GM48 family and includes a list of abbreviations used in the manual. Part 2 - Developers Kit This section lists the contents of the whole development kit and provides the information to setup and use the equipment. Part 3 - Integrating the Module This section describes each of the signals available on the GM47/GM48 modules, along with mechanical information. The section also provides you with design guidelines and explains what is needed to commercialise an application from a regulatory point of view. LZT 123 7263 R1A 13 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Part 4 - Using AT Commands This section lists all the AT Commands relevant to the GM47 and GM48, including their required parameters. The purpose of part 4 is to give you detailed information on the function of the AT Command set. 14 LZT 123 7263 R1A GM47/GM48 MODULES 2. GM47/GM48 Modules 2.1 About the GM47/GM48 Family Two modules make up the family; GM47 and GM48, for use in the 900/1800MHz and 850/1900MHz GSM bands respectively. Note!
As the characteristics of the modules are quite similar, this manual only refers to the GM48 where a difference exists; by default all other references are to the GM47. The products belong to a new generation of Sony Ericsson modules, and are intended to be used in machine-to-machine applications and man-to-
machine applications. They are used when there is a need to send and receive data (by SMS, CSD, HSCSD, or GPRS), and make voice calls over the GSM network. GM47 modules are not stand alone devices; they are used as the engine in an application created by the customer. A typical application, involves a micro-controller and GM47 module, in which the micro-
controller sends AT commands to the module via an RS232 communications link. 2.2 GM47 in a Communication System Figure 2.1 illustrates the main blocks of a wireless communication system using the GM47. It also shows the communication principles of the system. The definitions in the figure, as used elsewhere in this manual, are in accordance with the recommendations of GSM 07.07.
The MS (mobile station) represents the GM47 module plus SIM card. The module excluding SIM card, is known as the ME (mobile equipment).
The TE (terminal equipment) is a micro-controller (i.e., a computer) and is a part of the application. Wireless Communication System GSM Network Application TE
(DTE) ME status, responses AT commands to control MS MS
(GM47) Figure 2.1 Main Blocks in a Wireless System LZT 123 7263 R1A 15 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL In accordance with the recommendations of ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardisation Sector) V.24, the TE communicates with the MS over a serial interface. The functions of the GM47 follow the recommendations provided by ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) and ITU-T. ETSI specifies a set of AT commands for controlling the GSM element of the module; these commands are supplemented by Sony Ericsson specific commands. To find out how to work with AT commands, see Part 4: Using AT Commands, page 75. Figure 2.2 illustrates the interface between the module and the application. The entire System Connector Interface is described in detail in System Connector Interface, page 41. Signals and power MS
(GM47) Antenna connector TE
(Application) 60 pin system connector Figure 2.2 The Interface between the Module and the Application Note!
ITU-T standards define TE and TA as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and DCE (Data Circuit Terminating Equipment) respectively. 16 LZT 123 7263 R1A GM47/GM48 MODULES 2.3 Features The module performs a set of telecom services (TS) according to GSM standard phase 2+, ETSI and ITU-T. The functions of the module are implemented by issuing AT commands over a serial interface. 2.3.1 Types of Mobile Station GM47 and GM48 are dual band mobile stations with the characteristics shown in the tables below. GM47 GSM900 E-GSM900 GSM1800 Frequency Range (MHz) TX: 890-915 RX: 935-960 TX: 880-890 RX: 925-935 TX: 1710-1785 RX: 1805-1880 Channel spacing 200kHz 200kHz Number of channels 173 carriers *8 (TDMA) GSM: channels 1 to 124 E-GSM: channels 975 to 1023 374 carriers *8 (TDMA) DCS: channels 512 to 885 Modulation GMSK GMSK TX phase accuracy
< 5 RMS phase error (burst)
< 5 RMS phase error (burst) Duplex spacing Receiver sensitivity at antenna connector 45MHz
< 102dBm Transmitter output power at antenna connector Class 4 2W (33dBm) Automatic hand-over between GSM 900 and GSM1800 GM48 Frequency Range (MHz) GSM850 TX: 824-849 RX: 869-894 Channel spacing 200kHz 95MHz
< 102dBm Class 1 1W (30dBm) GSM1900 TX: 1850-1910 RX: 1930-1990 200kHz Number of channels 123 carriers *8 (TDMA) GSM: channels 128 to 251 298 carriers *8 (TDMA) PCS: channels 512 to 810 Modulation GMSK GMSK TX Phase Accuracy
< 5 RMS phase error (burst)
< 5 RMS phase error (burst) Duplex spacing Receiver sensitivity at antenna connector 45MHz
< 102dBm Transmitter output power at antenna connector Class 5 0.8W (29dBm) Automatic hand-over between GSM850 and GSM1900 80MHz
< 102dBm Class 1 1W (30dBm) LZT 123 7263 R1A 17 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.3.2 Short Message Service 2.3.3 Voice Calls 2.3.4 Data The module supports the following SMS services:
Sending; MO (mobile-originated) with both PDU (protocol data unit) and text mode supported.
Receiving; MT (mobile-terminated) with both PDU and text mode supported.
CBM (cell broadcast message); a service in which a message is sent to all subscribers located in one or more specific cells in the GSM network (for example, traffic reports).
SMS STATUS REPORT according to GSM 03.40.
SMS COMMAND according to GSM 03.40. The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using 7-bit encoding. For 8-bit data, the maximum length is 140 bytes. The module supports up to 6 concatenated messages to extend this function. The GM47 offers the capability of mobile originated and mobile terminated voice calls, as well as supporting emergency calls. Multi-party, call waiting and call deflection features are available. Some of these features are network-operator specific. For the inter-connection of audio, the module offers both single ended and balanced analogue input and output lines. Direct interface to the digital PCM (pulse code modulation) bus used within the module is available, thus by-passing the internal analogue circuitry. The GM47 has an embedded echo cancellation and noise suppression for improved audio quality. The module supports the following data protocols:
GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) Modules are Class B terminals, which provide simultaneous activation and attachment of GPRS and GSM services. GM47 modules are GPRS 4+1 enabled devices, which are capable of transmitting in one timeslot per frame (up link), and receiving at a maximum of four timeslots per frame (down link).
CSD (Circuit Switched Data) GM47 modules are capable of establishing a CSD communication at 9.6kbps.
HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data) . GM47 supports HSCSD communication, with one timeslot per frame capacity in the up link and two timeslots per frame capacity in the down link (2+1). 18 LZT 123 7263 R1A GM47/GM48 MODULES 2.3.5 SIM Card An external SIM card with 3V or 5V technology, can be connected to the module via its 60-pin system connector. 2.3.6 Average Power Consumption Idle Mode Transmit/Operation GSM850 and GSM900 GSM1800 and GSM1900 Voice/CSD
<5mA
<250mA (<2A peak) Data (GPRS 4+1)
<5mA
<350mA (<2A peak) Voice/CSD
<5mA
<250mA (<1.75A peak) Data (GPRS 4+1)
<5mA
<350mA (<1.75A peak) Note!
The power consumption during transmission is measured at maximum transmitted power. 2.3.7 Other Features These include:
Internet-ready module.
07.10 multiplexing.
GPS interoperability.
SIM application tool kit. 2.4 Service and Support 2.4.1 Web Pages Visit our web site for the following information:
where to buy modules or for recommendations concerning accessories and components;
the telephone number for customer support in your region;
FAQs (frequently asked questions). The web site address is:
http://www.sonyericsson.com/M2M 2.4.2 Integrators Manual This manual provides you with all of the information you need to integrate the module into your application. LZT 123 7263 R1A 19
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.4.3 Developers Kit Sony Ericsson provides the opportunity for designers to test the module on a limited scale using its Development Kit. The kit includes the necessary accessories (software and hardware) required to build and test an application. It includes the following:
GSM module, GM47 or GM48;
This integrators manual;
Software developers kit and manual;
Developers kit hardware. All the user needs to provide, is a computer or micro-controller and the expertise to use AT commands. GM47 and GM48 modules are static sensitive devices (SSDs). Normal SSD procedures for electronic devices should be used when handling the modules. In Part 3: Integrating the Module, page 37 you will find more information about safety and product care. Do not exceed the environmental and electrical limits as specified in Technical Data, page 73. 2.5 Precautions 20 LZT 123 7263 R1A ABBREVIATIONS 3. Abbreviations Abbreviation Explanations BT CBM CBS CSD DCE DTE DTMF EFR EMC ETSI FR GPRS GPS GSM HR HSCSD ITU-T ME MO MS MT PCM PDU RLP RF RTC SDP SIM SMS Bluetooth Cell Broadcast Message Cell Broadcast Service Circuit Switched Data Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Data Terminal Equipment Dual Tone Multi Frequency Enhanced Full Rate Electro-Magnetic Compatibility European Telecommunication Standards Institute Full Rate General Packet Radio Service Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile Communication Half Rate High Speed Circuit Switched Data International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardisation Sector Mobile Equipment Mobile Originated Mobile Station Mobile Terminated Pulse Code Modulation Protocol Data Unit Radio Link Protocol Radio Frequency Real Time Clock Service Discovery Protocol Subscriber Identity Module Short Message Service LZT 123 7263 R1A 21 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Abbreviation Explanations TA TE THD TS Terminal Adapter Terminal Equipment Third Harmonic Distortion Telecom Services 22 LZT 123 7263 R1A Part 2: Developers Kit Product Photo/Illustration 1. Introduction 1.1 Overview Note!
The developers kit is designed to get you started quickly. It contains all the hardware you will need to begin the development of an application. The only items you need to provide are; a computer or micro controller, a SIM card and network subscription, and a knowledge of programming with AT commands. Before connecting up and using the developers kit, we strongly recommend you read Part 3: Integrating the Module, page 37 and all of this section. There are many switches, jumpers and connector options in the developers kit. A knowledge of the functionality of the GM47 module is therefore essential before you start altering the hardware settings. The main hardware in the developers kit is a screened box, containing a board onto which you plug the GM47 module. Connectors, switches, jumpers and SIM card holder are provided to allow you to configure and access all the functions of the module. 1.2 Contents of the Kit Please take the time to check the contents of your kit against the list shown below. If any of the items are missing contact your supplier immediately. Developers kit - Part Number DPY 102 218 Contents:
Description Radio modem:
GM47 module or GM48 module GM47/GM48 developers kit (screened box and development board) Product Number Qty DPY 102 201 DPY 102 204 KRY 101 1907 Switched mode PSU 12V d.c. EPA-121DA-12 UK mains plug European mains plug EN90POWERLEADUK EN90POWERLEADEU LZT 123 7263 R1A 1 1 1 1 1 25 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Description Product Number Qty Cable with connector/cable serial 9-9 PIN DB9(M)-DB9(F) Portable handsfree Quad band antenna Data carrier/CD-ROM containing:
Software Manual;
Integrators Manual 2002-1-24 RG174 LZY 213 1319 1 1 1 1 1.3 General Functioning of the Kit The following block diagrams are provided to help you understand the general principles of operation of the developers kit. You have the following options as shown in Figure 1.1:
Connect the GM47 internally, direct to J4 or position it externally and connect to J10 via a flat cable.
Use the kits connectors to access and control the GM47 (all switches and jumpers in their default positions).
Access and control the GM47 directly via J12 and a flat cable. This allows you to selectively bypass any circuits contained on the board, and test your own application. J12 Pin header 60 pins male 1.27mm pitch External Application Pins connected in parallel J11 J10 J4 User selectable jumpers Developer's board circuits and ports Developer's board fit direct to J4 GM47 alternate flat cable to J10 Pin headers 60 pins female 1.27mm pitch Pin header 60 pins male 2.54mm pitch Figure 1.1 Module connections to the developers board Figure 1.2 shows the various on-board voltages and how they are fed to the GM47 and other circuitry. The developers board is powered by an external power supply connected to Vcc. 26 LZT 123 7263 R1A INTRODUCTION 5V to development board circuits Switched when VIO present 5V reg. 2V7 reg. VIO present LED 2V7 To development board & interface circuits 12v DC Power Socket, Input 10..15V 3V8 reg. Vcc VIO 3V8 VCC GM47
TP4 TP5 Figure 1.2 Power supply connection and the on-board voltages Figure 1.3, Figure 1.4 and Figure 1.5 show how various signals are routed on the developers board. Thicker lines indicate multiple signals. J12 VIO General purpose I/O LED ON/OFF STATUS LED
(Blinks when connected to network) GM47 SERVICE SW4 ON/OFF 2V7 IC VRTC SIM n/c SERVICE LED
(Lit when SW4 closed) 0.22F J5 Selectable Jumpers U10 SIM SIM holder with SIM presence switch (to DGND) Figure 1.3 Miscellaneous signals, connection and routing LZT 123 7263 R1A 27 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL J12 ATMS AFMS GM47 MICN, MICP, BEARN, BEARP Buzzer PCM Selectable Jumpers EAR
(Audio out) 3.5mm socket MIC
(Audio in) 3.5mm socket Handset RJ11 connector Buzzer PCM 8 pin Mini-DIN Figure 1.4 Audio signals, connection and routing J12 TD, RD, DTR, DCD, RTS, CTS, RI GM47 TD2, RD2 & SERVICE TD3 & RD3 UART1 (EDB) UART2 (ACB) UART3 Selectable jumpers Level shifters Figure 1.5 Comms signals, connection and routing 28 LZT 123 7263 R1A USING THE DEVELOPERS KIT 2. Using the Developers Kit This section provides you with the information needed to setup and use the developers kit. Before changing switch and jumper settings, refer to 2.3 Jumpers, Switches and Connectors, page 32. Front and rear views of the developers kit are shown below. To access the inside, remove the 8 screws on the top of the box and the cover plate. GM47/GM48 Developer's Kit HANDSET PCM MIC EAR Vcc NC OFF ON DCIO
+5V OFF APP 12v E C I V R E S S U T A T S O I V F F O
N O Figure 2.1 Front view RF UART3 UART1 UART2 Figure 2.2 Rear view LZT 123 7263 R1A 29 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.1 Start up Check List To use the developers kit in standard format check the following:
With the case lid removed, make sure the GM47 module is plugged into J4 and the RF lead is connected to the rear of the module;
Add your SIM card;
Check the jumpers are in their default positions. Refer to Figure 2.3;
Connect the serial cable between your computer and UART1 on the rear panel;
Connect the antenna to the RF connector on the rear panel;
Connect the audio equipment if required;
Plug the external power supply into the socket marked 12v on the front panel;
Switch Vcc to ON;
Push ON/OFF for at least 2 seconds until the yellow VIO LED is on. Your developers kit should now be operational and ready to receive AT commands. 30 LZT 123 7263 R1A USING THE DEVELOPERS KIT 2.2 Developers Board Overlay Figure 2.3 shows the developers board, including the position of all the connectors, switches and jumpers (default positions). You will notice that many jumpers are labelled SW. This is because the board was previously fitted with DIL switches. UART2
(ACB) Ground stud UART1
(EDB) RF connector UART3 7 U10 SIM Holder J5 SIM test connector J11 1 2 1 TP5 TP4 VCC J12 1 2 SW8 SW1 r o t c e n n o C n o i t a c i l p p A SW9 SW11 SW6 r o t c e n n o C t s e T J10 J4 1 2 2 1 l
) e b a c t a l f r o f
r o t c e n n o C m e t s y S r o t c e n n o C m e t s y S 0 6 0 6 9 5 JP18 9 5 0 6 JP21 SW7 SW3 9 5 SW10 SW5 9 5 0 6 JP24 SW4 12v Vcc DC Power NC/OFF/ON Socket, Input power to module 10..15V d.c. DCIO Maintain in OFF position
(Not used with this module. Only present for backward compatibility) ON/OFF
(module) O V I S U T A T S I E C V R E S Handset PCM MIC EAR Audio in
(ATMS) Audio out
(AFMS) Figure 2.3 Developers board overlay LZT 123 7263 R1A 31 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.3 Jumpers, Switches and Connectors You will notice that many jumpers are labelled SW. This is because the board was previously fitted with DIL switches. All jumpers are located on the developers board (see Developers board overlay, page 31). Jumper Signal Setting JP18 JP21 JP24 TD RD Reserved for future use SW4 SERVICE SW1, SW3, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, SW9, SW10, SW11, J11 links See diagram below Maintain jumper in lower default position Maintain jumper in lower default position JP21 JP18 MUST remain open to prevent damage to the module. As an extra precaution, maintain DCIO in the OFF position Connect the pins using the floating connector ONLY when programming the module or logging data Default positions shown below. Move any SW jumper to the right-hand position to divert the signal to connector J12. Remove the J11 links to bypass J8, J9 or CP1 and process audio signals externally J11 SIMRST SIMCLK SCL SDA VRTC RD3 (RX3) TD3 (TX3) PCMULD PCMIN PCMOUT PCMCLK BEARP SERVICE AFMS ATMS SW8 SW1 SW9 SW11 SW6 SW7 SW3 ON/OFF PRESENCE SIMVCC SIMDAT BUZZER LED RI DCD DTR CTS RTS RD (DFMS) TD (DTMS) RD2 (CFMS) TD2 (CTMS) PCMDLD PCMSYN MICN MICP BEARN The links shown on J11 must be in place to access audio on J8, J9 or CP1 47 49 48 50 SW10 SW5 59 60 32 LZT 123 7263 R1A USING THE DEVELOPERS KIT All switches are mounted on the front panel of the developers box. Switch Description Operation Vcc Toggle switch ON/OFF Push button switch DCIO Toggle switch Switches power from external power supply to module. Has three positions; NC, OFF and ON. Switch to ON to connect power to the module Switches module on and off. To power up the module, push button for at least 2 seconds, until the yellow VIO LED is on. Repeat the process to turn the module off Maintain in OFF position to prevent damage to the module. Included only for backwards compatibility Connector Description Connections UART1
(EDB) 9-way D socket
(accessible on the rear panel) Full 9-pin RS232 communication port. Used during run-time to communicate with the module (AT-commands, data transmission, etc.) DCD RD RTS TD CTS DTR RI 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 UART2
(ACB) 9-way D socket
(accessible on the rear panel) 3 line RS232 communications port
(+SERVICE). Used during service and maintenance operations. Also used to download new software to the module RD2 SERVICE TD2 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 UART3 9-way D socket
(accessible on the rear panel) 3 line serial port. RS232 levels RD3 TD3 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 LZT 123 7263 R1A 33 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Connector Description Connections Handset RJ11 socket PCM 8 pin mini-DIN connector Connector for a standard telephone handset. As PCM paths are open inside the module, a default short circuit is made between PCMDLD-PCMIN and PCMULD-
PCMOUT signals on test connector J11 to enable analogue audio in downlink and uplink directions. Jumpers are in place between pins 48 & 50 and between pins 47
& 49 1 2 3 4 Pin #
1 2 3 4 Signal MICN BEARN BEARP MICP Carries PCM signals Pin #
Signal VIO (2.75V d.c. output) PCMULD PCMDLD PCMCLK PCMSYNC DGND PCMIN PCMOUT DGND 2 1 9 8 6 5 7 3 4 J4 J5 U10 EAR SYSTEM connector Allows direct connection of the module to the development board (see Figure 2.3, page 31) SIM card test connector Connector to gain access to the SIM card signals, which are connected in parallel with U10 Pin #
Signal SIMVCC SIMRST SIMCLK SIMDAT SIMPRESENCE SIMGND SIMGND SIM Holder Connector for SIM card. Signals are also present at test connector J5, described above 3.5mm 2-pole jack socket Audio output (unbalanced) or Audio From Mobile Station (AFMS). Make sure jumpers are in place between pins 48 & 50 and between pins 47 & 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MIC 3.5mm 2-pole jack socket ground signal Audio input (unbalanced) or Audio To Mobile Station (ATMS). Signal source must be AC-coupled as a bias voltage for electret microphones is provided
(2.0 - 2.5Vd.c.). Make sure Jumpers are in place between pins 48 & 50 and between pins 47 & 49 34 LZT 123 7263 R1A USING THE DEVELOPERS KIT Connector Description Connections J10 J11 J12 12v RF SYSTEM connector TEST connector Application connector For optional flat cable connection between the module and the development board
(see Figure 2.3, page 31) 60 pin, 2.54mm pitch, dual row pin header that carries all signals present at the system connector of the module. Used for easy testing of the signals (see Figure 2.4, page 36) For flat cable connection between a host application and the module. Most of the signals pass through jumpers that allow the developer to select whether a specific signal is routed to/from the development board or to/from the host application. If no application is connected to J12, these jumpers (SW1, SW3, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, SW9, SW10 & SW11) serve as on/off switches for the module signals (see Figure 2.3, page 31) 2.1mm DC Power Socket SMA panel socket Allows connection of an external power supply. Between 10V and 15V d.c. at 6 watts is required Connect the supplied antenna LZT 123 7263 R1A 35 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.4 System Connector Pin Assignments Refer to the table below when monitoring signals on, or connecting to, J10, J11 or J12. The table shows the system-connector pin assignments for the GM47 module. J10, J11 & J12 pin numbering viewed from the front of the developers box 1 2 59 60 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC VCC Reserved for future use SIMVCC SIMRST SIMCLK IO1 IO3 VRTC ADC2 SDA BUZZER LED TX_ON DTR RTS TD (DTMS) TD3 (TX3) TD2 (CTMS) PCMULD PCMOUT PCMSYNC MICP BEARP AFMS ATMS DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND ON/OFF SIMPRESENCE SIMDAT DAC IO2 IO4 ADC1 ADC3 SCL OUT5 VIO RI DCD CTS RD (DFMS) RD3 (RX3) RD2 (CFMS) PCMDLD PCMIN PCMCLK MICN BEARN SERVICE AGND 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 Figure 2.4 System connector pin assignments 36 LZT 123 7263 R1A Part 3: Integrating the Module Product Photo/Illustration 1. Mechanical Description 1.1 Interface Description The pictures below show the mechanical design of the GM47 along with the positions of the different connectors and mounting holes. The GM47 is protected with AISI 304 stainless steel covers that meet the environmental and EMC requirements. Mounting hole/ground connection System connector Antenna connector Figure 1.1 GM47 viewed from below Figure 1.2 GM47, viewed from above Please note the following:
Mounting holes positioned at the corners make it possible to securely bolt the module into your application. LZT 123 7263 R1A 39 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
Keypad, display, microphone, speaker and battery are not part of the module.
The SIM card is mounted in your application, external to the module.
The System Connector is a 60-pin, standard 0.05in (1.27mm) pitch type. The pins and their electrical characteristics are described in 2. System Connector Interface, page 41.
Information about the Antenna Connector is found in 3. Antenna Connector, page 65. 1.2 Physical Dimensions 2.20 (4x) 4.78 2.86 3.80 2.05 4.60 3.00 7.15 2.90 2.80 50.00 33.00 30.20 9.00 2.30 46.40 1.80 Figure 1.3 Dimensions of the GM47 Measurements are given in millimetres. See also Technical Data, page 73. 40 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. System Connector Interface 2.1 Overview Electrical connections to the module (except the antenna), are made through the System Connector Interface. The system connector is a 60-pin, standard 0.05in (1.27mm) pitch device. The system connector allows both board-to-board and board-to-cable connections to be made. The table below shows two possible mating connectors for use in your applications. Use the board-board connector to connect the module directly to a PCB, and the board-cable connector to connect the module via a cable. Part Number Description 9462-9101-606 Female, board-board connector (Speed Tech) TBD Female, board-cable connector Figure 2.1 below shows the numbering of the connector pins. A ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RF connector on the module as shown below. Connect this ground point to the DGND pins of the module by the shortest, low-impedance path possible. The purpose of this connection is to allow any ESD picked up by the antenna to bypass the modules internal ground path. Ground connection Pin 59 Pin 1 Pin 60 Pin 2 Figure 2.1 GM47, viewed from underneath LZT 123 7263 R1A 41 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL The following table gives the pin assignments for the system connector interface and a short description for each signal. Note!
Under the heading Dir in the table, module input and output signals are indicated by the letters I and O respectively. Pin Signal Name Dir Signal Type Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND VCC DGND Reserved for future use ON/OFF SIMVCC SIMPRESENCE
I
I Supply Power supply
Digital ground Supply Power supply
Digital ground Supply Power supply
Digital ground Supply Power supply
Digital ground Supply Power supply
Digital ground Supply Power supply
Digital ground Internal pull up, open drain Turns the module on and off. Former WAKE_B Digital 3V/5V SIM card power supply. Power output from module for SIM Card Internal pull up, open drain SIM Presence A 1 indicates that the SIM is missing; a 0 that it is inserted SIMRST O Digital 3V/5V SIM card reset SIMDATA I/O Digital 3V/5V SIM card data SIMCLK DAC IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 VRTC ADC1 ADC2 O O I I I I I I I Digital 3V/5V SIM card clock Analogue Digital to analogue converter Digital 2.75 General purpose input/output 1 Digital 2.75 General purpose input/output 2 Digital 2.75 General purpose input/output 3 Digital 2.75 General purpose input/output 4 Supply 1.8V Supply for real time clock Analogue Analogue to digital converter 1 Analogue Analogue to digital converter 2 42 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Pin Signal Name Dir Signal Type Description 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 ADC3 SDA SCL BUZZER OUT5 LED VIO TX_ON RI DTR DCD RTS CTS TD 42 RD 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 TD3 RD3 TD2 RD2 PCMULD PCMDLD PCMOUT PCMIN PCMSYNC PCMCLK MICP MICN BEARP I I/O O O O O O O O I O I O I O I O I O I O O I O O I I O Analogue Analogue to digital converter 3 2.75, internal pull up 2.75, internal pull up I 2C data I 2C clock Digital 2.75 Buzzer output from module Digital 2.75 Programmable output 5 Digital 2.75 Flashing LED Power Out 2.75V Module power indication. VIO is a 2.75V at 75mA output supply that can be used to power external circuitry that interfaces to the GM47 Digital 2.75 This output indicates when the GSM module is going to transmit the burst Digital 2.75 Ring Indicator (UART1) Digital 2.75 Data Terminal Ready (UART1) Digital 2.75 Data Carrier Detect (UART1) Digital 2.75 Request To Send (UART1) Digital 2.75 Clear To Send (UART1) Digital 2.75 Digital 2.75 Transmitted Data (UART1). Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module). Former DTMS Received Data (UART1). Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host). Formerly DFMS Digital 2.75 UART3 transmission Digital 2.75 UART3 reception Digital 2.75 Digital 2.75 UART2 transmission. Used for flashing the memory. Former CTMS UART2 Reception. Used for flashing the memory. Former CFMS Digital 2.75 DSP PCM digital audio input Digital 2.75 DSP PCM digital audio output Digital 2.75 Codec PCM digital audio output Digital 2.75 Codec PCM digital audio input Digital 2.75 DSP PCM frame sync Digital 2.75 DSP PCM clock output Analogue Microphone Input positive Analogue Microphone Input negative Analogue Speaker output positive LZT 123 7263 R1A 43 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Pin Signal Name Dir Signal Type Description 56 57 58 59 60 BEARN AFMS SERVICE ATMS AGND O O I I
Analogue Speaker output negative Analogue Audio output from module 2.7V Flash programming voltage for the MS. Enable logger information if not flashing. Formerly VPPFLASH Analogue Audio input to module
Analogue ground 2.2 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics Many of the signals, as indicated in the table above, are high-speed CMOS logic inputs or outputs powered from a 2.75V5% internal voltage regulator, and are defined as Digital 2.75V. Whenever a signal is defined as Digital 2.75V, the following electrical characteristics apply. Parameter Min. Max. Units High Level Output Voltage (VOH), Io = 2mA 2.2 Low Level Output Voltage (VOL), Io = 2mA 0 High Level Input Voltage (VIH) Low Level Input voltage (VIL) 1.93 0 2.75 0.6 2.75 0.8 V V V V 2.2.1 General Protection Requirements
All 2.75V digital inputs will continuously withstand and suffer no damage in the power-on or power-off condition when subjected to any voltage from -0.5V to 3.47V (3.3V+5%).
All 2.75V digital outputs will continuously withstand a short circuit to any other voltage within the range 0V to 3V.
All analogue outputs will continuously withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range 0V to 3V.
The SIM output signals and the SIMVCC supply will continuously withstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range 0V to 5.8V. 44 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 2.3 Grounds Pin 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 60 Signal DGND AGND Description Digital ground Analogue ground There are two ground connections in the GM47, AGND (analogue ground) and DGND (digital ground). Pin assignments are shown in the table above. Note!
AGND and DGND are connected at a star point inside the module. They must not be joined together in your application. 2.3.1 Analogue Ground - AGND AGND is the return signal, or analogue audio reference, for ATMS
(Audio To Mobile Station) and AFMS (Audio From Mobile Station). Parameter Imax Limit 12.5mA 2.3.2 Digital Ground - DGND DGND is the reference or return signal for all system interface digital signals and is also the d.c. return for SERVICE and the power supply, VCC. Connect all DGND pins together in your application in order to carry the current drawn by the module. 2.4 VCC - Regulated Power Supply Input Pins 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Signal VCC Description regulated power supply input Power is supplied to the module VCC pins, from an external source. Connect all VCC pins together in your application in order to carry the current drawn by the module. LZT 123 7263 R1A 45 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL The electrical characteristics for VCC are shown in the table below. Parameter Vcc supply voltage Maximum allowable voltage drop Current drawn, at full TX power Mode Nominal Limit 3.6V Tolerance including ripple a 3.4V - 4.0V Over-voltage limit 5.5V Maximum ripple TBD Burst transmission 200mV
<600mA (average)
<2A (peak) a. Measured at system connector pins. Note!
GM47 has no internal capacitance to supply the large current peaks during GSM burst transmission. We recommend you follow these general guidelines:
Fit a low ESR electrolytic capacitor close to the module: minimum value 1,000F, <100m ESR.
Make sure power supply to module line resistance is <200m . 2.5 ON/OFF and External Power Signal Pin 14 34 Signal Dir Description ON/OFF VIO I O Pulse signal to turn the module on or off 2.75V supplied by the module 2.5.1 Switching the module ON and OFF The module is turned on and off by momentarily grounding the ON/OFF pin. This input should be driven by an open collector, or other device which will not tie the input high, to allow the internal alarm clock function to operate. See the table below for exact characteristics. In the OFF state the current consumption of the module is less than 100A. The ON/OFF signal is a digital input with the following characteristics:
Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Units Voltage HIGH level (FALSE) Voltage LOW level (TRUE) 0 Pull-up resistance (internal) VCC 0.3 x VCC 39 V V k 46 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE The following timing diagram illustrates both power-up and power-
down processes. Module on Module off t1 t2 ON/OFF tpwr VIO Module powered Module power-up Module power-down Figure 2.2 ON/OFF timing and VIO performance Times are defined as follows:
Time Description Min. Typ. Max. Units t1 t2 Turn-on pulse time Turn-off pulse time Hardware-reset pulse timea tpwr Time for VIO and internal voltages to be established 2 1
>10 100 a. Active only when a full system reset is required. s s s 200 ms 2.5.2 VIO - 2.75V Supply VIO provides an output voltage derived from an internal 2.75V regulator. Its electrical characteristics are shown below. Parameter Min. Output Voltage (Iload = 50mA) 2.70 Typ. 2.75 Load current Max. Units 2.85 75 V mA You can use this output for the following:
to indicate that the module is alive;
to power interface circuits, external to the module. LZT 123 7263 R1A 47
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.6 Analogue Audio Pin 57 59 60 Signal AFMS ATMS AGND Dir O I
Description Audio from mobile station Audio to mobile station Ground (return) for analogue audio ATMS is the audio input, and AFMS is the audio output, of the module. These signals can be used in Hands-free or Portable Hands-free mode. Hands-free Mode This mode is used for audio accessories, such as car kits and hands-free equipment. Portable Hands-free Mode This is the default mode. It activates a different amplification factor in the ME, and activates a 2V microphone bias level for ATMS. The bias level is adjustable using AT*E2EAMS. 2.6.1 Audio To Mobile Station - ATMS ATMS is the analogue audio input to the module. Internally, the signal is sent to the CODEC (COder/DECoder), where it is converted to digital audio in PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) format. The encoded audio is sent to PCMOUT via the internal PCM bus. ATMS provides a DC bias when it is used as the microphone input in Portable Hands-free applications. All other sources must be a.c.-coupled to avoid attenuation of low frequencies, and to prevent incorrect biasing or damage to the ATMS input. Use a capacitor greater than the value shown in the table below. The ATMS input is a passive network followed by the transmit part of the CODEC. Parameter Application driving impedance (0.3 - 3.5kHz) AC coupling capacitance a Module input impedance (0.3 - 3.5kHz) Limit 300 1F
>50k Low frequency cut-off (-3dB) 300Hz 50Hz 48 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE Parameter Limit High frequency cut-off (3dB)
> 3500Hz 50Hz Output d.c. bias level Hands-free mode 0V Portable hands-free mode 2.0V 0.1V Additional Gain in Portable hands-free mode 28.5dB a. The a.c.-coupling capacitance must be supplied by your application, unless a d.c.-coupled microphone is used. The following tables show the nominal PGA (programming gain settings). For more information see the relevant AT commands. Maximum input voltage limit: 245mVrms Input Input (mVrms) TXAGC (dB) AUX AMP gain PCMOUT (dBm0) ATMS 245 0 13 3 Maximum input level at MICI, 61.4mVrms output at PCMOUT = 3dBm0 Input Differential input (mVrms) TXAGC (dB) AUX AMP gain PCMOUT (dBm0) MICN MICP 61.4 0 25 3 Output at AFMS for 3dBm0 at PCMIN Input dBm0 RXPGA Volume control (dB) AFMS (mVrms) PCMIN 3 0 0 436 Output at BEARN/BEARP for 3dBm0 at PCMIN Input dBm0 RXPGA Volume control (dB) BEAR (mVrms) PCMIN 3 0 0 388 2.6.2 Audio From Mobile Station - AFMS AFMS is the analogue audio output from the module and may be used to drive a speaker or the ear-piece in a portable hands-free accessory. PCM digital audio signals, entering the module through the PCMIN pin, are translated to analogue signals by the CODEC. See 2.7 Digital Audio, page 52 for further information. LZT 123 7263 R1A 49 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL The table below shows the audio signal levels for AFMS. Parameter Speaker impedance Output Capacitance Levels (THD <5%) Limit 64 to 1k 2.2F 10%
>2.4Vp-p
>2.2Vp-p
>1.3Vp-p Drive capability into 5k
(0.3 - 3.5kHz) Drive capability into 1.5k
(0.3 - 3.5kHz) Drive capability into 150
(at 1kHz) 2.6.3 Microphone Signals Pin 53 54 Speaker signals Dir Function MICP MICN I I Microphone positive input Microphone negative input MICP and MICN are balanced differential microphone input pins. These inputs are compatible with an electret microphone. The microphone contains an FET buffer with an open drain output, which is supplied with at least +2V relative to ground by the module as shown below. MICP MICN 2 - 2.5V
@ 1mA 1k 68nF CODEC 68nF GM47 1k AGND Figure 2.3 Microphone connections to the module 50 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 2.6.4 Speaker Signals Pin 55 56 Speaker signals BEARP BEARN Dir O O Function Speaker positive output Speaker negative output BEARP and BEARN are the speaker output pins. These are differential-mode outputs. The electrical characteristics are given in the table below. Parameter Output level (differential) Output level (dynamic load = 32) Gain PCMINa to BEARP/BEARN (differential) Distortion at 1kHz and maximum output level Offset, BEARP to BEARN Ear-piece mute-switch attenuation Limit 4.0Vpp 2.8Vpp 9dB 1 5%
30mV 40dB a. See PCMIN signal in 2.7 Digital Audio, page 52 The following table shows the ear piece impedances that can be connected to BEARP and BEARN. Ear piece model Impedance Tolerance Dynamic ear piece Dynamic ear piece Piezo ear piece
[32 + 800H] // 100pF
[150 + 800H] // 100pF 1k + 60nF 20%
20%
20%
LZT 123 7263 R1A 51 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.7 Digital Audio Pin Signal Dir Function 52 51 47 48 50 49 PCMCLK PCMSYNC PCMULD PCMDLD PCMIN PCMOUT O O I O I O PCM clock PCM frame sync PCM audio input to DSP PCM audio output from DSP PCM audio input to Codec PCM audio output to Codec Digital PCM audio signals allow the connection of a digital audio source/receiver, bypassing the analogue audio CODEC processing functions performed within the module. GM47 PCMSYNC & PCMCLK PCMDLD PCMULD PCMIN PCMOUT DSP CODEC System connector Link for internal digital-audio processing Analogue audio signals Figure 2.4 Pin connections to digital audio Note!
When no external audio processing is performed, the following pins must be connected together:
PCMDLD to PCMIN;
PCMULD to PCMOUT. Electrical characteristics Digital 2.75V CMOS input/output electrical characteristics apply. 52 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE PCM interface format The PCM format (for PCMULD and PCMDLD) conforms to the linear PCM data I/O format of the industry standard DSP from Texas Instruments. It is the same format as the one used between the CODEC and the DSP in the module. PCMCLK (bit clock) and PCMSYNC (frame synchronisation) are both generated by the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) in the module. The data words in PCMULD and PCMDLD are aligned so that the MSB in each word occurs on the same clock edge. 2.8 Serial Data Interfaces Pin Signal Dir Description 41 42 39 40 37 38 36 45 46 43 44 TD RD RTS CTS DTR DCD RI TD2 RD2 TD3 RD3 I O I O I O O I O I O Serial data to module (UART1) Serial data from module (UART1) Request To Send (UART1) Clear To Send (UART1) Data Terminal Ready (UART1) Data Carrier Detect (UART1) Ring Indicator (UART1) UART2 Data Transmission UART2 Data Reception UART3 Data Transmission UART3 Data Reception RS232 CCITT N 103 104 105 106 108.2 109 125 The serial channels, consisting of three UARTs, are asynchronous communication links to the application or accessory units. UART1 has RS-232 functionality. UART2 and UART3 behave as general-purpose serial data links. In addition they are used for accessories and GPS respectively. Digital 2.75V CMOS input/output electrical characteristics apply. The standard character format consists of 1 start bit, 8 bit data, no parity and 1 stop bit. In all, there are 10 bits per character. 2.8.1 UART1 (RS232) - RD, TD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD and RI UART1 signals conform to a 9 pin RS232 (V.24) serial port, except for the DSR (CCITT No 107) signal. The DSR signal has been removed as it is usually connected to DTR in most systems. LZT 123 7263 R1A 53 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Note!
UART1 signal levels do not match standard RS232 (V.28) levels. The relationship between the levels is shown in the table below. RS232 level RD, TD RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI CMOS level
< 3V
>+3V 1 0 OFF ON
>1.93V
<0.80V Conversion between the module CMOS levels and RS232 levels can be achieved using a standard interface IC, such as the Maxim Integrated Products MAX3237. 2.8.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD The default baud rate is 9.6kbits/s, however higher bit rates of up to 460 kbits/s are supported, set by an AT command. UART1 starts at a rate of 9.6kbits/s in standard AT command mode or binary mode (first received data, AT or binary, will determine the operation mode). The module also supports GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol and starts when the appropriate command is sent. Serial Data From Module (RD) RD is an output signal that the module uses to send data via UART1 to the application. Parameter Application load resistance Application load capacitance Limit 100k
<500pF Serial Data To Module (TD) TD is an input signal, used by the application to send data via UART1 to the module. Parameter Application driving impedance Input capacitance Input resistance (pull-up) Limit
<100 1nF 100k to VCC 2.8.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI UART1 control signals are active low and need a standard interface IC, such as the MAX3237, to generate standard RS232 levels. UART1 converted signals, together with DGND, RD and TD form a 9-pin RS232 data port. 54 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE RTS and CTS are capable of transmitting at 1/10th of the data transmission speed for data rates up to 460kbit/s (byte-oriented flow control mechanism). Switching times for RTS and CTS The table below shows the switching times. Parameter Time from Low to High level Time from High to Low level Request to Send (RTS) Limit
<2s
<2s Used to condition the DCE for data transmission. The default level is high by internal pull up. The exact behaviour of RTS is defined by an AT command. Software of hardware control can be selected. Hardware flow is the default control. The application must pull RTS low to communicate with the module. The module will respond by asserting CTS low, indicating it is ready for communication. Parameter Application driving impedance Input capacitance Input resistance (pull-up) Limit
<100
<2nF 100k to VCC Clear To Send (CTS) CTS indicates that the DCE is ready to transmit data. The default level is high. You can define the exact behaviour of CTS through an AT command, and can select software or hardware flow control. The table below shows the load characteristics for this signal. Parameter Application load capacitance Application load resistance Limit
<500pF 1M LZT 123 7263 R1A 55 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Data Terminal Ready (DTR) DTR indicates that the DTE is ready to transmit and receive data. It also acts as a hardware hang-up, terminating calls when switched high. The signal is active low. You can define the exact behaviour of DTR with an AT command. Data Carrier Detect (DCD) DCD indicates that the DCE is receiving a valid carrier (data signal) when low. You can define the exact behaviour of DCD with an AT command. Ring Indicator (RI) RI indicates that a ringing signal is being received by the DCE when low. You can define the exact behaviour or RI with an AT command. Data Set Ready (DSR) No DSR signal is provided. Use any DGND connection for this functionality. 2.8.4 UART2 - TD2, RD2 UART 2 consists of a full duplex serial communication port with transmission and reception lines. This communication port works in a mode called Operation and Maintenance. Operation and Maintenance mode works in combination with the SERVICE signal. Two events are possible if the SERVICE signal is active when the module is turned on. These are:
the module is reprogrammed if UART2 is connected to a computer running Sony Ericsson update software;
the module enters logging mode and sends data to UART2 if no reprogramming information is received. Timing and electrical signals characteristics are the same as for UART1, TD and RD. Transmitted Data 2 (TD2) TD2 is used by the application to send data to the module via UART2. It has the same electrical characteristics as TD. Received Data 2 (RD2) RD2 is used to send data to the application via UART2. It has the same electrical characteristics as RD. 56 LZT 123 7263 R1A
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 2.8.5 UART3 - TD3, RD3 UART3 is a full duplex serial communication port with transmission and reception lines. It has the same timing and electrical signal characteristics as UART1, TD and RD. Transmitted Data 3 (TD3) TD3 is used by your application to send data to the module via UART3. Received Data 3 (RD3) RD is used to send data to your application via UART3. 2.9 SIM Card Related Signals Pin Signal Dir Description 15 16 17 19 18 SIMVCC SIMPRESENCE SIMRST SIMCLK SIMDATA
I O O SIM card power supply SIM card presence SIM card reset SIM card clock I/O SIM card data These connections allow you to communicate with the SIM card holder in you application. Note!
The distance between the SIM card holder and the module can be up to 25cm. This SIM interface allows the use of 3V and 5V SIM cards. By default it works on 3V levels but will automatically switch to 5V, if a 5V SIM card is fitted. LZT 123 7263 R1A 57 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL SIM voltage levels, as shown in the following table, are dependent on the type of SIM card detected by the module. Signal Parameter Mode Min. Typ. Max. Unit SIMVCC SIM supply voltage SIMDAT High Level Input voltage (VIH) SIMDAT Low Level Input voltage (VIL) SIMDAT High Level Output voltage (VOH) SIMDAT Low Level Output voltage (VOL) SIMCLK SIMRST High Level Output voltage (VOH) SIMCLK SIMRST Low Level Output voltage (VOL) 3V 5V 3V 5V 3V 5V 3V 5V 3V 5V 3V 5V 3V 5V 2.7 4.5 2.1 3.5 0 0 2.7 4.7 0 0 2.4 4.4 0 0 3.0 5.0 3.3 5.5 3.0 5.0 0.9 1.5 3.0 5.0 0.2 0.2 3.0 5.0 0.35 0.3 V V V V V V V V V V V V V V 2.9.1 SIM Detection - SIMPRESENCE SIMPRESENCE is used to determine whether a SIM card has been inserted into or removed from the SIM card holder. You should normally wire it to the card inserted switch of the SIM card holder, but different implementations are possible. When left open, an internal pull-up resistor maintains the signal high and means SIM card missing to the module. When pulled low the module assumes a SIM card is inserted. SIMPRESENCE is a Digital 2.75 CMOS input with the following electrical characteristics. Parameter Pull-up resistance (at 2.75 V) Low Level Input voltage (SIM inserted) Min. 100 High Level Input voltage (SIM missing)
>1.93 Typ. Max. Units k V V 0.80 2.75 58 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 2.10 Service/Programming Pin 58 Signal SERVICE Dir I Description Flash programming voltage When the SERVICE input signal is active the module will:
be reprogrammed if data is received through UART2 from a computer running Sony Ericsson reprogramming software;
or it will output logging data on UART2. The electrical characteristics are given below. The signal reference is DGND. Mode Normal Operation Service/enable programming SERVICE Voltage (V) Min. Typ. Max. Drive Capacity 1.9 2.75 0.8 13.6
>1mA Pin 31 Signal BUZZER Dir O Description Buzzer output from module Connecting the BUZZER signal to an inverting transistor-buffer followed by a piezoelectric transducer enables the module to play pre-
programmed melodies or sounds. Pin 33 Signal LED Dir O Description LED Output from module The LED states shown below, are hard coded. LED indication Operational status No indication Green, steady No power or in the OFF state Power on, not connected to a network Green, blinking Power on, connected to a network 2.11 Buzzer 2.12 LED LZT 123 7263 R1A 59 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL The following circuit should be used to connect an LED. VIO GM47 LED DGND 220 2k2 10k BC817 Figure 2.5 Electrical connections for the LED 2.13 General Purpose Digital I/O Ports Pin I/O port signal Default signal Description 21 22 23 24 37 32 36 38 IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IN5
Programmable Input/Output 1 Programmable Input/Output 2 Programmable Input/Output 3 Programmable Input/Output 4 DTR Programmable input 5/Data Terminal Ready OUT5 OUT6
RI Programmable output 5 Programmable Output 6/Data Carrier Detect OUT7 DCD Programmable Output 7/Ring indicator Signals which have an entry in the Default Signal column in the above table are multiplexed. Their operation depends on AT commands. The following table gives you the input impedance. These values only apply when the signals are configured as input signals. Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Units Input impedance (IO1 - IO4) (pull-up) Input impedance (IN5) 39 100 20 100 k k 60 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 2.14 General Purpose Analogue I/O Ports Pin Signal 20 26 27 28 DAC ADC1 ADC2 ADC3 Dir O I I I Description Digital to analogue conversion output Analogue to digital conversion input 1 Analogue to digital conversion input 2 Analogue to digital conversion input 3 The module is able to convert digital to analogue signals and vice versa. 2.14.1 Digital to Analogue Converter - DAC The DAC is an 8-bit converter. Conversion takes place when an AT command is sent to the module. The module sends the resulting analogue value to the DAC pin. DAC output electrical characteristics are given in the following table. Parameter Resolution Output voltage for code = 0 Output voltage for code = 255 Nominal step size Absolute errorb Limit 8
(2.75a x 0.05) 0.05
(2.75a x 0.95) 0.05
(2.75a x 0.9)/256 0.5 Output wide-band noise and clock feed-through 0-1.1MHz Power-supply rejection ratio 50Hz - 10kHz 0.5 40 Conversion rate 0.5LSB Output buffer impedance when disabled Output current source or sink Current consumption (active) 2 (Load A)c 50 (Load B)c 50 1 1.0 a. Tolerance on this internal voltage is 5%
b. Referred to the ideal conversion characteristic. c. See Figure 2.6, page 62 Units Bits V V mV mV mVrms dB ms ms k mA mA 61 LZT 123 7263 R1A GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL DAC DGND DAC DGND 100 - 200pF 100k Load A 10nF 1nF 1k Load B Figure 2.6 DAC loads 2.14.2 Analogue to Digital Converters 1, 2 and 3 - ADCx The ADC is an 8-bit converter. An analogue value applied to any of the ADC pins is converted and stored in a register inside the module. When the appropriate AT command is received by the module, the digital value stored in the register is read. ADC electrical characteristics are shown in the table below. Parameter Resolution Input voltage for 0000 0000 word Min. 8 0 Max. 8 0.01 x 2.75a Input voltage for 1111 1111 word 0.99 x 2.75a 2.75a Differential Non-Linearity (DNL) Overall Non-Linearity (INL) Absolute accuracy Input impedance Average supply current
(continuous conversion) External source impedance 1 a. Tolerance on this internal voltage is 5%
0.75 0.60 1.5 1 50 Units Bits V V LSB LSB LSB M mA k 62 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE 2.15 External I 2C Serial Control Bus Pin 29 30 Signal SDA SCL Dir I/O O Description I 2C serial data I 2C serial clock The external I 2C bus consists of two signals, SDA and SCL. This bus is isolated from the modules internal I 2C bus to ensure proper operation of the module, even if the external I 2C bus is damaged. The electrical characteristics are shown below. Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Units t i m s n a r T n o i t r a e p o i e v e c e R n o i t r a e p o Frequency I 2C CLK High or low I 2C CLK Delay time after falling edge of I 2C CLK Hold time after falling edge of I 2C CLK Frequency I 2C CLK High or low I 2C CLK Delay time after falling edge of I 2C CLK Hold time after falling edge of I 2C CLK 81.25 400 kHz 1.2 308 0 1.2 100 0 308-
1230 s ns ns 400 kHz s ns ns 2.16 TX_ON - Burst Transmission Pin 35 Signal TX_ON Dir O Description GSM module to transmit Burst transmission is the time when a GSM transceiver unit is transmitting RF signals. TX_ON indicates the module is going into transmission mode. LZT 123 7263 R1A 63 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.17 Real Time Clock Pin 25 Signal VRTC Dir
Description Voltage for the Real Time Clock The Real Time Clock provides the main microprocessor with a time-of-
day calendar and alarm, and a one-hundred-year calendar. The Real Time Clock operates in two modes when connected to a separate power supply:
RTC normal mode: the module is in ON or OFF mode and it is supplied with power (VCC is applied).
RTC back-up mode: VCC is disconnected and the RTC is maintained by a separate backup power supply connected to the VRTC input (see Figure 2.7 below). Backup power is provided by a capacitor, golden-capacitor or battery in your application and must be connected to the VRTC pin. During RTC normal operation, the back up source will be charged. In back-up mode, the back-up source must provide enough power for RTC operation. Refer to the table for the amount of current required. The following table shows both voltage characteristics for both modes. Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Units Supply Voltage RTC (normal mode -
charging the capacitor) Supply Voltage RTC (back-up mode -
Capacitor provides the current) 1.6 1.0 Current drawn 1.8 1.8 5.0 2.0 2.0 V V 10.0 A If the voltage drops below 1.0 V in back-up mode, the RTC will stop working. The following diagram shows the RTC connections. Backup supply
VRTC GM47 DGND Figure 2.7 RTC connections 64 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. ANTENNA CONNECTOR 3. Antenna Connector The modules antenna connector allows transmission of the radio frequency (RF) signals from the module to an external customer-
supplied antenna. The connector is a micro-miniature coaxial MMCX surface mounted component. A number of suitable MMCX type, mating plugs are available from the following manufacturers;
Amphenol;
Suhner;
IMS Connector Systems. The electrical characteristics of the antenna interface are shown below. Parameter Limit Description Nominal impedance 50 (better than 2:1) Output Power Static Sensitivity 2 Watt peak (Class 4) Extended GSM900 1 Watt peak (Class 1) GSM1800 Better than 104dBm Extended GSM900 Better than 102dBm GSM1800 LZT 123 7263 R1A 65 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 66 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE 4. Hints for Integrating the Module This chapter gives you advice and helpful hints on how to integrate the GM47 into your application from a hardware perspective. Please read and consider the information under the following headings before starting your integration work:
Safety advice and precautions.
Installation of the module.
Antenna. 4.1 Safety Advice and Precautions 4.1.1 General
Always ensure that use of the module is permitted. The module may present a hazard if used in proximity to personal medical electronic devices. As a rule, the module must not be used in hospitals, airports or planes.
You are responsible for observing your countrys safety standards, and where applicable the relevant wiring rules.
Never use the module at a gas station, refuelling point, blasting area or in any other environment where explosives may be present.
Operating the module close to other electronic devices, such as antennas, television sets, and radios may cause electromagnetic interference.
Never try to dismantle the module yourself. There are no components inside the module that can be serviced by the user. If you attempt to dismantle the module, you may invalidate the warranty.
To protect the power supply cables and meet the fire safety requirements, it is recommended that the electrical circuits are supplied with a power regulator. The power regulator should be placed as close to the terminals of the power supply as possible.
Do not connect any incompatible component or product to the GM47. Note, Sony Ericsson does not warrant against defects, non-
conformities or deviations caused thereby.
Before handling the SIM card in your application, ensure that you are not charged with static electricity. Use proper precautions to avoid electrostatic discharges. The module must be switched off before the SIM card is installed in your application. 4.1.2 SIM Card LZT 123 7263 R1A 67 4.1.3 Antenna GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
When the SIM card hatch is opened, the SIM card connectors lie exposed under the SIM card holder. CAUTION: Do not touch these connectors! If you do, you may release an electrical discharge that could damage the module or the SIM card.
When designing your application, the SIM cards accessibility should be taken into account. We always recommend that you have the SIM card protected by a PIN code. This will ensure that the SIM card cannot be used by an unauthorized person.
If the antenna is to be mounted outside, consider the risk of lightning. Follow the instructions provided by the antenna manufacturer.
Never connect more than one module to a single antenna. The module can be damaged by radio frequency energy from the transmitter of another module.
Like any mobile station, the antenna of the module emits radio frequency energy. To avoid EMI (electromagnetic interference), you must determine whether the application itself, or equipment in the applications proximity, needs further protection against radio emission and the disturbances it might cause. Protection is secured either by shielding the surrounding electronics or by moving the antenna away from the electronics and the external signals cable.
The module and antenna may be damaged if either come into contact with ground potentials other than the one in your application. Beware, ground potential are not always what they appear to be.
In the final application, the antenna must be positioned more than 20cm away from human bodies. When this rule cannot be applied, the application designer is responsible for providing the SAR measurement test report and declaration. 4.2 Installation of the Module 4.2.1 Where to Install the Module There are several conditions which need to be taken into consideration when designing your application as they might affect the module and its function. They are:
Environmental Conditions The module must be installed so that the environmental conditions stated in the Technical Data chapter, such as temperature, humidity and vibration are satisfied. Additionally, the electrical specifications in the Technical Data section must not be exceeded. 68 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE Signal Strength The module has to be placed in a way that ensures sufficient signal strength. To improve signal strength, the antenna can be moved to another position. Signal strength may depend on how close the module is to a radio base station. You must ensure that the location at which you intend to use the module, is within the network coverage area. Degradation in signal strength can be the result of a disturbance from another source, for example an electronic device in the immediate vicinity. More information about possible communication disturbances can be found in section 4.3.5, page 72. When an application is completed, you can verify signal strength by issuing the AT command AT+CSQ. See AT+CSQ Signal Strength, page 118. Tip!
Before installing the module, use an ordinary mobile telephone to check a possible location for it. In determining the location for the module and antenna, you should consider signal strength as well as cable length Connection of Components to GM47 The integrator is responsible for the final integrated system. Incorrectly designed or installed, external components may cause radiation limits to be exceeded. For instance, improperly made connections or improperly installed antennas can disturb the network and lead to malfunctions in the module or equipment. Network and Subscription
Before your application is used, you must ensure that your chosen network provides the necessary telecommunication services. Contact your service provider to obtain the necessary information.
If you intend to use SMS in the application, ensure this is included in your (voice) subscription.
Consider the choice of the supplementary services described in section 2.3.2 Short Message Service, page 18. 4.2.2 How to Install the Module Power Supply
Use a high-quality power supply cable with low resistance. This ensures that the voltages at the connector pins are within the allowed range, even during the maximum peak current. An electrolytic capacitor should be placed close to the power supply pins of the module to supply the peak currents during burst transmission. See VCC - Regulated Power Supply Input, page 45.
See section 2.2.1 General Protection Requirements, page 44. LZT 123 7263 R1A 69 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Grounds A ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RF connector on the module (see Figure 2.1, page 41). Connect this ground point to the DGND pins of the module by the shortest, low-impedance path possible. The purpose of this connection is to allow any ESD picked up by the antenna to bypass the modules internal ground path. It is recommended that you use a cable with a maximum resistance of 5m for the ground connection. AGND and DGND are connected at a star point inside the module. They must not be joined together in your application. Note!
Note!
Audio Use a coupling capacitor in ATMS line if the application does not use the modules bias voltage. See also Figure 2.3 Microphone connections to the module, page 50. Software Upgrade To upgrade the software, the system connector must be accessible in your application. The pins SERVICE, TD, RD and the power signals are used for this purpose. Please contact customer support for more details. 4.3 Antenna 4.3.1 General The antenna is the component in your system that maintains the radio link between the network and the module. Since the antenna transmits and receives electromagnetic energy, its efficient function will depend on:
the type of antenna (for example, circular or directional);
the placement of the antenna;
communication disturbances in the vicinity in which the antenna operates. In the sections below, issues concerning antenna type, antenna placement, antenna cable, and possible communication disturbances are addressed. In any event, you should contact your local antenna manufacturer for additional information concerning antenna type, cables, connectors, antenna placement, and the surrounding area. You should also 70 LZT 123 7263 R1A
4.3.2 Antenna Type 4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE determine whether the antenna needs to be grounded or not. Your local antenna manufacturer might be able to design a special antenna suitable for your the application. Make sure that you choose the right type of antenna for the module. Consider the following requirements:
the antenna must be designed for the dual frequency bands in use:
EGSM/GSM900/1800 for the GM47 and GSM850/1900 for the GM48;
the impedance of the antenna and antenna cable must be 50 ;
the antenna output-power handling must be a minimum of 2W;
the VSWR value should be less than 3:1 to avoid damage to the module. 4.3.3 Antenna Placement The antenna should be placed away from electronic devices or other antennas. The recommended minimum distance between adjacent antennas, operating in a similar radio frequency band, is at least 50cm. If signal strength is weak, it is useful to face a directional antenna at the closest radio base station. This can increase the strength of the signal received by the module. The modules peak output power can reach 2W. RF field strength varies with antenna type and distance. At 10cm from the antenna the field strength may be up to 70V/m and at 1m it will have reduced to 7V/m. In general, CE-marked products for residential and commercial areas, and light industry can withstand a minimum of 3V/m. 4.3.4 The Antenna Cable Use 50 impedance low-loss cable and high-quality 50 impedance connectors (frequency range up to 2GHz) to avoid RF losses. Ensure that the antenna cable is as short as possible. The Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio (VSWR) may depend on the effectiveness of the antenna, cable and connectors. In addition, if you use an adapter between the antenna cable and the antenna connector, it is crucial that the antenna cable is a high-quality, low-loss cable. Minimize the use of extension cables, connectors and adapters. Each additional cable, connector or adapter causes a loss of signal power. LZT 123 7263 R1A 71
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 4.3.5 Possible Communication Disturbances Possible communication disturbances include the following:
Noise can be caused by electronic devices and radio transmitters.
Path-loss occurs as the strength of the received signal steadily decreases in proportion to the distance from the transmitter.
Shadowing is a form of environmental attenuation of radio signals caused by hills, buildings, trees or even vehicles. This can be a particular problem inside buildings, especially if the walls are thick and reinforced.
Multi-path fading is a sudden decrease or increase in the signal strength. This is the result of interference caused when direct and reflected signals reach the antenna simultaneously. Surfaces such as buildings, streets, vehicles, etc., can reflect signals.
Hand-over occurs as you move from one cell to another in the GSM network. Your mobile application call is transferred from one cell to the next. Hand-over can briefly interfere with communication and may cause a delay, or at worst, a disruption. 72 LZT 123 7263 R1A 5. TECHNICAL DATA 5. Technical Data Mechanical Specifications Maximum length Maximum width Maximum thickness 50mm 33mm 7.15mm (excluding connector pins and top of antenna connector) Weight 18.5g Power supply voltage, normal operation Voltage Ripple 3.6V nominal (3.4V - 4.0V)
<100mV @ 200kHz; <20mV @ >200kHz Voltage must always stay within a normal operating range, ripple included Power consumption Voice/CSD: <250mA (< 2A peak) Data (GPRS 4+1); <350mA (<2A peak) Idle mode: <5mA Switched off: <100A Radio specifications Frequency range GM47: EGSM 900MHz and 1800MHz (dual band) GM48: GSM 850MHz and 1900MHz (dual band) Maximum RF output power Antenna impedance GM47: 2W GM48: 1W 50 SIM card 3 V or 5 V Support of external SIM card LZT 123 7263 R1A 73 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Environmental specifications Operating temperature range
-25C to +55C Storage temperature range Maximum relative humidity Stationary vibration, sinusoidal Stationary vibration, random Non-stationary vibration, including shock
-40C to +85C 95% at +40C Displacement: 7.5mm Acceleration amplitude: 20m/s and 40m/s Frequency range: 2-8Hz, 8-200Hz, 200-500Hz Acceleration spectral density (m/s):
0.96, 2.88, 0.96 Frequency range:
5-10Hz, 10-200Hz, 200-500Hz, 60min/axis Shock response spectrum I, peak acceleration:
3 shocks in each axis and direction;
300m/s, 11ms Shock response spectrum II, peak acceleration:
3 shocks in each axis and direction;
1000m/s, 6ms Bump Acceleration: 250m/s Free fall transportation 1.2m Rolling pitching transportation Angle: 35degrees; period: 8s Static load 10kPa Low air pressure/high air pressure 70kPa/106kPa Data Storage SMS storage capacity 40 in ME In addition, the unit can handle as many SMS as the SIM can store Phone book capacity 100 74 LZT 123 7263 R1A Part 4: Using AT Commands Product Photo/Illustration 1. Introduction to AT Commands 1.1 Overview AT commands, issued from a computer in your application are used to control and implement the functions of the module. Using AT commands, the following actions are possible:
Control of DCE
GPRS
Call control
Supplementary Service
SIM application tool kit The GM47 contains a large number of Ericsson-specific commands in addition to those implemented in accordance with the GSM and ITU-T recommendations. These commands are provided to enhance the functions of the module. The Ericsson-specific commands are identified by the asterisk that precedes the command (see the syntax description provided below). 1.2 Syntax Description This section provides a brief description of the syntax used for the GM47, AT command set. See the ITU-T recommendation V.25ter for additional information. 1.2.1 Conventions In this manual, the following conventions are used to explain the AT commands.
<command>
<parameter>
The name of the command that is to be entered. The parameter values that are defined for a certain command. The command line is terminated by the Carriage Return or Enter key. Line feed character. The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical element. The brackets do not appear in the command line.
<CR>
<LF>
LZT 123 7263 R1A 77 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
Value Square brackets are used to indicate that a certain item is optional. For example, sub-parameters of a command or an optional part of a response. The brackets do not appear in the command line. The default values of the supported parameters are indicated by using bold text when presenting the value.
Other characters, including ?, =, parenthesis, etc., appear in commands and responses as written.
The final result codes OK, ERROR, +CME ERROR: <err> and CMS ERROR:<err> (see sections 1.2.3, AT Response Syntax and 1.3, Error Codes) are not listed under Possible Responses for each AT command.
OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses. 1.2.2 AT Command Syntax The AT standard is a line-oriented command language. Each command is made up of the following three elements:
the prefix;
the body;
the termination character. The prefix consists of the letters AT, which are derived from the first two letters of the word attention. The body is made up of the command, the parameter, and if applicable the associated values. Commands may be combined in the same command line. Spaces between the individual bodies are ignored. Basic Syntax Command The format of basic syntax commands is as follows:
AT<command>[=][<parameter>]
Example! ATL=0<CR> (sets the volume of the speaker) Additional commands may follow a command on the same command line without any character being required for separation. For the command D parameters, see the description for the command in question. A version of the basic syntax is:
AT<command><parameter>
Extended Syntax Command
AT+<command>= [<parameter>]
78 LZT 123 7263 R1A
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS
AT*<command>=[<parameter>]
Example! AT+CFUN=0<CR> (powers down the module) If several values are included in the command, they are separated by commas. It is also possible to enter commands with no values. Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the same command line if a semicolon (; IRA 3B) is inserted after the preceeding extended command as a separator. Read Command Syntax The read command is used to check the current values of parameters. Type ?, after the command line:
AT+<command>?
AT*<command>?
AT<command>?
Example! AT+CSCS?<CR> (show current character set)
<CR>IRA<CR>(information text response)
<CR>OK<CR>(final result code response) Test Command Syntax The test command is used to test whether the command has been implemented or to give information about the type of subparameters it contains. Type ?, after the command line:
AT+<command>=?
AT*<command>=?
Example! AT+CPAS=?<CR> (shows supported values for the response parameters)
<CR>CPAS: (0, 3, 4, 129, 130, 131)<CR> (supported values)
<CR>OK<CR> (final result code) If the indicated <parameter> is not recognized, the result code ERROR is issued. Note!
Possible responses are indicated both as <command>:(list of supported<parameter>) and (in most cases) the actual range of the parameter values. 1.2.3 AT Response Syntax The default mode response shown below, is in text mode. See the command V for further details. LZT 123 7263 R1A 79 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Possible formats for the result codes are:
Basic format result code, such as OK. The Basic result code also has a numerical equivalent.
Extended format result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+) or an asterisk (*):
AT+<command>: <parameter >
AT*<command>: <parameter>
where the <parameter> is the result code value, note that a single space character separates the colon character from the <parameter>. If several values are included in the result code, they are separated by commas. It is also possible that a result code has no value. The extended syntax result codes have no numerical equivalent. They are always issued in alphabetical form.
Information text response may contain multiple lines separated by
<CR>. The TE detects the end of informational text responses by looking for a final result code response, such as OK. There are two types of result code responses as outlined below:
Final Result Code A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command is completed and another command may be issued.
If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the result code OK.
If you type an AT command that is not implemented, or which had the wrong parameter or syntax, you will get an error result code. It is ERROR or, for example, +<command> ERROR followed by an error code. Final result codes are:
Value OK ERROR NO DIALTONE BUSY NO ANSWER NO CARRIER General meaning Command executed, no errors Invalid command or command line too long No dialling possible, wrong mode Remote station busy Connection completion time-out Link not established or disconnected Unsolicited Result Code Unsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directly associated with a command being issued from the TE. 80 LZT 123 7263 R1A 1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS 1.3 Error Codes 1.3.1 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code) This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code. If
+CME ERROR: <err> is the result code for any of the commands in a command line, none of the commands in the same command line will be executed (neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a result of a completed command line execution). The format of <err> can be either numerical or alphabetical, and is set with the +CMEE command. The table below provides the numerical values for the parameter <err>.
<err>
Description Syntax 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 30 Phone failure No connection to phone Phone -adaptor link reserved Operation not allowed Operation not supported PH-SIM PIN required SIM not inserted SIM PIN required SIM PUK required SIM failure SIM busy SIM wrong Incorrect password SIM PIN2 required SIM PUK2 required Memory full Invalid index Not found Memory failure Text string too long Invalid characters in text string Dial string too long Invalid characters in dial string No network service LZT 123 7263 R1A 81 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<err>
Description Syntax 31 32 100 Network time-out Network not allowed - emergency calls only Unknown 101- 255 Reserved by ETS 1.3.2 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment or to the network. The operation is similar to the ERROR result code. None of the following commands in the same command line will be executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code will be returned. ERROR is returned normally when an error is related to syntax or invalid parameters. Nevertheless, it always appears when a command fails. The syntax is as follows:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Values for the <err> parameter are described in the following table.
<err>
0 - 127 128 - 255 Description GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values 300 301 302 303 304 305 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 320 ME failure SMS service of ME reserved Operation not allowed Operation not supported Invalid PDU mode parameter Invalid text mode parameter SIM not inserted SIM PIN required PH-SIM PIN required SIM failure SIM busy SIM wrong SIM PUK required SIM PIN2 required SIM PUK2 required Memory failure 82 LZT 123 7263 R1A 1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS
<err>
321 322 330 331 332 340 500
- 511 512-
Description Invalid memory index Memory full SMSC address unknown No network service Network time-out No +CNMA acknowledgment expected Unknown error Other values in range 256 - 511 are reserved Manufacturer specific 1.4 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands After every group of AT commands there is a section where some of the more complicated commands are exemplified. For a detailed description of the command in question (valid parameter values, AT command syntax and Response syntax) you are recommended to see its own descriptive section. LZT 123 7263 R1A 83 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 84 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. Call Control 2.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control See 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control 2.2 ATA Answer Incoming Call Description Command Possible Responses Answer an incoming call ATA
ERROR
OK Signals the MS to answer an incoming call. The command is followed by a final result code such as OK or ERROR, and the MS enters the command state. LZT 123 7263 R1A 85 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.3 ATD Dial Description Syntax Possible Responses
Originate a call and dial the phone number specified in the command as
<dial_string>
or
Do a network detect Dial the phone number stored in the mobile phone which is located by the index
<I>
ATD<dial_string>[;]
ATD>ME<I>[;]
Dial the phone number stored in the SIM card which is located by the index <I>
ATD>SM<I>[;]
ATD>LD<I>[;]
Dial the phone number stored in the Last dialled number list on the SIM card, which is located by the index
<I>
The most recently dialled number is assumed to have
<I>="1"
Redial the last phone number dialled. Ericsson specific ATDL[;]
CONNECT
CONNECT <text>
NO CARRIER
ERROR
NO DIAL TONE
BUSY
OK
CONNECT
CONNECT <text>
NO CARRIER
ERROR
NO DIAL TONE
BUSY
OK
CONNECT
CONNECT <text>
NO CARRIER
ERROR
NO DIAL TONE
BUSY
OK
CONNECT
CONNECT <text>
NO CARRIER
ERROR
NO DIAL TONE
BUSY
OK Used to initiate a phone connection, which may be data or voice (phone number terminated by semicolon). The phone number used to establish the connection will consist of digits and modifiers, or a stored number specification. If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the phone that the number is a voice rather than a data number. If the dial string is omitted, and the semicolon included, the command instructs the ME to do a network detect. If the network is available OK is returned. Abortability:
Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission from the DTE to the DCE of any character. A single character shall be sufficient to abort the command in progress; however, characters 86 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. CALL CONTROL transmitted during the first 125 milliseconds after transmission of the termination character are ignored. This is to allow the DTE to append additional control characters such as line feed after the command line termination character.
<dial_string>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # +
Valid characters for origination W
, T P
<Final Result Code>
CONNECT The W modifier is ignored but is included only for compatibility purposes The comma modifier is ignored but is included only for compatibility purposes The T modifier is ignored but is included only for compatibility purposes The P modifier is ignored but is included only for compatibility purposes Description If connection is successfully established, only valid for data connections CONNECT
<text>
If connection is successfully established, only valid for data connections NO CARRIER Unable to establish a connection or the connection attempt was aborted by the user ERROR An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish the connection NO DIALTONE The mobile phone is being used for a voice call or is not within coverage of the network BUSY OK
<text>
28800 19200 14400 9600 4800 2400 The phone number called is engaged, valid for data and voice connections Only valid for voice connections Description Connected with data bit rate of 28800 bits/s (HSCSD) Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD) Connected with data bit rate of 14400 bits/s (HSCSD) Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s LZT 123 7263 R1A 87 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.4 ATH Hang up Description Command Possible Responses Terminate the call ATH
ERROR
OK Signals the MS to terminate an active call. 2.5 ATL Monitor Speaker Loudness Description Command Possible Responses Request monitor speaker loudness Shows the current setting Answer an incoming call ATL[<value>]
ATL?
ATL=?
OK
ERROR L: <value>
L: (list of supported
<values>s) Controls the volume of the monitor speaker. The specific loudness level indicated by low, medium and high is manufacturer specific. It is intended to indicate increasing volume.
<value>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-14dB (minimum speaker volume)
-10.5dB
-7dB
-3.5dB 0dB (nominal speaker volume) 3.5dB 7dB 10.5dB 14dB (maximum speaker volume) 88 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. CALL CONTROL 2.6 ATO Return to Online Data Mode Description Command Possible Responses Return to on-line data mode ATO[<value>]
CONNECT
CONNECT <text>
NO CARRIER
ERROR Switch to the on-line data mode from the on-line command mode during an active call. Returns ERROR when not in on-line command mode.
<value>
Description 0 Return to on-line data state from on-line command 2.7 ATP Select Pulse Dialling Description Command Possible Responses Select pulse dialling ATP Show if the command is supported?
ATP=?
OK OK Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It would normally cause the next D command to use pulses when dialling the number. 2.8 ATT Select Tone Dialling Description Command Possible Responses Select tone dialling ATT Show if the command is supported?
ATT=?
OK OK Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It would normally cause the next D command to use tones when dialling the number. LZT 123 7263 R1A 89 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.9 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control Description Command Possible Responses Set call progress monitoring control Read the current setting Show if the command is supported?
ATX=[<n>] or ATX[<n>]
ATX?
ATX=?
OK
ERROR X: <n>
X: (list of supported
<n>s) Defines if the dial-tone detection and busy-tone detection are to be used during a call.
<n>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 Body and dial tone detection off. No line speed reported on connection Body and dial tone detection off. Report line speed on connection Busy detection on and dial tone detection off. Report line speed on connection Busy detect off and dial tone on. Report line speed on connection Busy detect and dial tone detection on. Report line speed on connection. Default value Note!
If there is no network available the <n> parameter will decide if NO DIALTONE or NO CARRIER will be returned. If the call recipient is busy, the <n> parameter will decide if BUSY or NO CARRIER will be returned. 2.10 AT+CHUP Hang up Call Description Command Possible Responses Request hang-up AT+CHUP Show if the commands is supported AT+CHUP=?
OK
ERROR
OK
ERROR Causes the TA to hang-up the current call of the ME. If no call is present, but an incoming call is notified, then the incoming call shall be rejected. Note!
The purpose of this command is not to replace the V.25ter [4] command H, but to give an assured procedure to terminate an alternating mode call. 90 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. CALL CONTROL 2.11 AT+CMOD Call Mode Description Command Possible Responses Request Call Mode AT+CMOD=[<mode>]
Shows the current setting AT+CMOD?
Show if the command is supported AT+CMOD=?
OK
ERROR
+CMOD: <mode>
OK
ERROR
+CMOD: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
ERROR Selects the call mode of further dialing commands (D) or for next answering command (A). Mode can be either single or alternating. In this ETS, terms alternating mode and alternating call refer to all GSM bearer and teleservices that incorporate more than one basic service (voice, data, fax) within one call. When single mode is selected the call originating and hang-up procedures are similar to procedures specified in ITU-T Recommendations V.25ter [4], T.31 [5] and T.32 [6]. In GSM there can be voice followed by data (refer GSM 02.02 [7]), alternating voice/data
(refer GSM 02.02 [7]) and alternating voice/fax calls (refer GSM 02.03
[8]). Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
+CMOD is set to zero after a successfully completed alternating mode call. It is set to zero also after a failed answering. The power-up, factory
(&F) and user resets (Z), also set the value to zero. This reduces the possibility that alternating mode calls are originated or answered accidentally.
< mode>
Description 0 1 2 3 Single mode (default) In order to avoid accidental originating or answering of alternating calls is <mode> set to single mode in following cases:
- after a successfully completed alternating mode call;
- after a unsuccessful answering;
- after successfully execution of the commands &F and Z Alternating voice/fax (teleservice # 61). Not Supported Alternating voice/data (bearer service # 61). Not Supported Voice followed by data (bearer service # 81). Not Supported 4..127 Reserved by GSM 07.07. Not Supported Note!
LZT 123 7263 R1A 91 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 2.12 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up Description Syntax Possible Responses Set Command
+CVHU=[<mode>]
Read command
+CVHU?
Test if the command is supported
+CVHU=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
+CVHU: <mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CVHU (list of supported <mode>s) Selects whether ATH or drop DTR causes a voice connection to be disconnected or not. Voice connection also includes alternating mode calls that are currently in voice mode. Note!
When <mode>=2, this command must be viewed in conjunction with the V.25ter [3] command &D, or &D will be ignored.
<mode>
Description 0 1 2 Drop DTR ignored but OK response given. ATH disconnects Drop DTR and ATH ignored but OK response given Drop DTR behavior according to &D setting. ATH disconnects. Default 2.13 AT+VTS DTMF and Tone Generation Description Command Possible Responses Request transmission of DTMF tone(s) AT+VTS=<DTMF>
Show if the command is supported AT+VTS=?
OK ERROR OK ERROR This command allows the transmission of DTMF tones. These tones may be used, for example, when announcing the start of a recording period. The command is write only. In this profile of commands, the command does not operate in data or fax modes of operation
(+FCLASS=0,1,2-7). Note!
The ATD-command is used only for dialing. It is not possible to generate arbitrary DTMF tones using the ATD command. 92 LZT 123 7263 R1A 2. CALL CONTROL Note!
The AT+VTS command is used only during a voice call.
<DTMF>
Description ASCII character string An ASCII character string with entries in the set 0-9, # , *, A-
D separated by commas. Each entry is interpreted as a single ACSII character. Example: The string 8,9 sends two DTMF tones, 8 followed by 9 LZT 123 7263 R1A 93 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 94 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. Control and Status 3.1 ATQ Result Code Suppression Description Command Possible Responses Set Result Code Suppression Read the current setting Show if the command is supported ATQ[=]<value>
ATQ?
ATQ=?
OK
ERROR Q: <value>
Q: (list of supported
<value>s) Determines whether or not the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE. When result codes are being suppressed, no portion of any intermediate, final, or unsolicited result code - header, result text, line terminator, or trailer - is transmitted. Note!
The Ingo-module triggers on the response from ref. Point E. It is therefore not possible to turn off the response in ref. Point E.
<value>
Description 0 1 DCE transmits result codes. Default value Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted 3.2 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control Description Command Possible Responses Automatic answer control Read the current setting Show if the command is supported ATS0=[<rcnt>]
ATS0?
ATS0=?
OK
ERROR
<rcnt>
S0: (list of supported
<rcnt>s) Defines the automatic answering feature of the modem. A non-zero value specifies the number of rings before the call is answered. LZT 123 7263 R1A 95 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Note!
Call is always answered in the current fax class, regardless of whether the incoming call is voice, data, or fax.
<rcnt>
Description 0 1-7 Disable automatic answer. Default value Answer after the specified number of rings 3.3 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character Description Command Possible Responses Set escape sequence character ATS2=[<esc>]
Read the current setting ATS2 Show if the command is supported ATS2=?
OK
ERROR
<esc>
S2: (list of supported
<esc>s) Defines the character to be used as the escape sequence character when switching from on-line data mode to on-line command mode. The response to the command is modified to reflect the change.
<esc>
43 0 to 255 Description Escape sequence character. Default value Escape sequence character Note!
If the <esc> parameter is set to a value in the range of 128-255, the escape sequence detection is disabled. 3.4 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character Description Command Possible Responses Set Command Line Termination Character ATS3=<value>
Read the current setting Show if the command is supported ATS3?
ATS3=?
OK
ERROR
<value>
S3: (list of supported
<value>s) This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognised by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incoming command line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S4 parameter. 96 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line termination character for entry of the command line containing the S3 setting command. However, the result code issued uses the value of S3 as set during the processing of the command line. For example, if S3 was previously set to 13 and the command line "ATS3 30" is issued, the command line is terminated with a <CR> character (IA5 0/13), but the result code issued uses the character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5 2/
14) in place of the <CR>.
<value>
Description 13 Command line termination character, Default value 0 to 127 Command line termination character 3.5 ATS4 Response Formatting Character Description Command Possible Responses Set Response Formatting Character ATS4=<value>
Read the current setting Show if the command is supported ATS4?
ATS4=?
OK
ERROR
<value>
S4: (list of supported
<value>s) This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see the description of the V parameter for usage). If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issued in response to that command line will use the new value of S4.
<value>
Description 10 Formatting character. Default value 0 to 127 Formatting character LZT 123 7263 R1A 97 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 3.6 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE) Description Command Possible Responses Request Command Line Editing Character ATS5=<value>
Shows the current setting Show if the command is supported ATS5?
ATS5=?
OK
ERROR
<value>
S5: (list of supported
<value>s) This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character recognised by the DCE as a request to delete from the command line the immediately preceding character.
<value>
Description 8 Line editing character. Default value 0 to 127 Line editing character 3.7 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control Description Command Possible Responses Blind dial delay control ATS6=[<dly>]
Read the current setting Show if the command is supported ATS6?
ATS6=?
OK
<dly>
S6: (list of supported
<dly>s) Defines the number of seconds to wait before call addressing when a dial tone is not detected. This command is ignored by the Infrared Modem and is only included for compatibility.
<dly>
Description 2 Wait two seconds before blind dialling.Default value. 2-255 Number of seconds to wait before blind dialling 98 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS 3.8 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout Description Command Possible Responses Set connection completion timeout ATS7=[<tmo>]
Read the current setting Show if the command is supported ATS7?
ATS7=?
OK
ERROR
<tmo>
S7: (list of supported
<tmo>s) Defines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialling and the connection being established. If this time is exceeded then the connection is aborted.
<tmo>
Description 50 1-255 Timeout value in seconds. Default value Timeout value in seconds 3.9 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control Description Set Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control Command ATS8=[<dly>]
Read the current setting. Show if the command is supported. ATS8?
ATS8=?
<dly>
Description Possible Responses
OK
ERROR
<dly>
S8: (list of supported
<dly>s) 2 The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds. Default value 1-255 The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds LZT 123 7263 R1A 99 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 3.10 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control Description Command Possible Responses Set Automatic Disconnect Delay Control Read the current setting ATS10=[<val>]
ATS10?
OK
ERROR
<val>
Show if the command is supported ATS10=?
S10: (list of supported
<val>s) Specifies the amount of time that the DCE will remain connected to the line after the absence of received line signals.
<val>
Description 2 Remains connected for two tenths of a second. Default value 1-254 Number of tenths of a second of delay 3.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring Description Command Possible Responses Set Call Monitoring on or off AT*ECAM=<onoff>
Read the current status for Call Monitoring AT*ECAM?
Test if the command is supported AT*ECAM=?
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ECAM: <onoff>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ECAM: list of supported <onoff>s
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function in the ME. When this log function is activated in the ME, the ME informs about call events, such as incoming call, connected, hang up etc. It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with result code *ECAV when activating the log function. The purpose of this is two fold:
to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE;
100 LZT 123 7263 R1A
3. CONTROL AND STATUS to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for an ongoing call.
<onoff>
Description 0 1 The call log function is disabled (off) The call log function is enabled (on)
<ccid>
Description Integer (1-7) A number which uniquely defines a call in the phone (=
number of call control process). There can not be two call ids with the same number simultaneously. The maximum number of call control processes is 7, 5 multiparty members, one call on hold and one waiting call
<ccstatus>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IDLE CALLING (MO) CONNECTING (MO) ACTIVE (connection between A and B) HOLD WAITING (MT) ALERTING (MT) BUSY
<calltype>
Description 1 2 4 128 VOICE DATA FAX VOICE2
<processid>
Description Integer Reported when returning to the IDLE state (<ccstatus> =
0). 8 = H08 = CC (Call control) 68 =H44 = MM (Mobile Management) 69 = H45 = MS (Mobile Station) 122 = H7A = RR (Radio Resources)
<exit cause>
Description Integer Exit cause according to GSM 04.08. Reported when returning to IDLE state (<ccstatus> = 0) LZT 123 7263 R1A 101
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<number>
Description String
<type>
Integer String type phone number of format specified by <type>. Only valid for <ccstatus> = 1 (CALLING) Description Type of address octet in integer format (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7). ; default 145 when dialing string includes international access code character +, otherwise 129. Only valid for <ccstatus> = 1 (CALLING) 3.12 AT*EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time Description Command Possible Responses Set Daylight Saving Time AT*EDST=<dst>
Read current Daylight Saving Time AT*EDST?
Show if the command is supported AT*EDST=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EDST: <dst>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EDST: (list of supported <dst>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command sets the daylight saving time hours. Note!
This command affects the MS clock set with the AT+CCLK command. To avoid confusion it is recommended the daylight saving time (DST) is set with this command before setting the actual local time with AT+CCLK.
<dst>
Description 0 1 2 Standard time Daylight saving time, +1 hour Daylight saving time, +2 hours 102 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS 3.13 AT*EMAR Ericsson Master Reset Description Perform a master reset in the MS Command AT*EMAR Shows if the command is supported or not AT*EMAR=?
Possible Responses
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command requests the MS to reset user data. The user data in the MS will be reset to the default values. This command also unlocks the MS. 3.14 AT*EPEE Ericsson Pin Event Description Command Possible Responses Requests the MS to inform when the PIN code has been inserted AT*EPEE=<onoff>
Test if the command is supported AT*EPEE=?
Read the current status for PIN Code Request AT*EPEE?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EPEE: (list of supported <onoff>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EPEE: <onoff>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR The command requests the MS to report when the PIN code has been inserted and accepted.
<onoff>
Description 0 1 Request for report on inserted PIN code is not activated
(off) Request for report on inserted PIN code is activated (on) LZT 123 7263 R1A 103 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 3.15 AT*ESMM Ericsson Settings Minute Minder Description Command Possible Responses Sets the Minute Minder to on or off AT*ESMM=<mode>
Read the current setting AT*ESMM?
Test if the command is supported or not and the possible settings AT*ESMM=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESMM: <mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESMM: list of supported <mode>s
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command sets the minute minder setting to on or off in the MS. Test command returns the <mode> value.
<mode>
Description 0 1 OFF, minute minder off. Default setting ON, minute minder on 3.16 AT+CALA Set Alarm Description Command Possible Responses Set an alarm time in the ME AT+CALA=<time>
List current active alarm settings in ME AT+CALA?
Show list of supported parameter values AT+CALA=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CALA: <time>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Sets an alarm time in the ME. The alarm time is set in minutes and hours. Date, seconds and time zone cannot be set. The alarm must be set again by the user after it has been released. It will not ring automatically every day at the same time. 104 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS The alarm function uses the ring type and the ring level defined with the AT*ERIN and AT*ERIL commands.
<time>
Description string type value Refer to AT+CCLK command. Only minutes and hours are used 3.17 AT+CALD Alarm Delete Description Command Possible Responses Delete an alarm AT+CALD=<n>
Show if the command is supported AT+CALD=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CALD: (list of supported <n>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command removes an active alarm.
<n>
Description Integer type Index identifying an active alarm 3.18 AT+CAPD Postpone or Dismiss an Alarm Description Command Possible Responses Postpone or dismiss an alarm AT+CAPD=[<sec>]
Show if the command is supported AT+CAPD=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CAPD: (list of supported <sec>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command controls an active (occurring) alarm by either postponing it or dismissing it. If more than one alarm occurs at the same time, this command dismisses or postpones the last activated alarm.
<sec>
0 1600 540 Description Dismiss the alarm Postpone the alarm (snooze) for <sec> seconds. Not supported Postpone the alarm (snooze) for 540 seconds (9 minutes). This is the only supported value LZT 123 7263 R1A 105 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 3.19 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date Description Command Possible Responses Set the real time clock of the ME AT+CCLK=<time>
Show the current setting AT+CCLK?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CCLK: <time>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CCLK=?
OK
ERROR Sets the real time clock of the ME. If setting fails in an ME, error +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current setting of the clock.
<time>
Description string type value Format is yy/mm/dd,hh:mm:sszz, where characters indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and time zone (indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and GMT; range -47...+48), e.g. 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2 hours reads 94/05/06,22:10:00+08 NOTE: If the ME does not support time zone information then the three last characters of <time> are not returned by +CCLK?
3.20 AT+CEER Extended Error Report Description Request an Extended Error Report Command AT+CEER Show if the command is supported AT+CEER=?
Possible Responses
+CEER: <report>
OK
ERROR
OK
ERROR Causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text <report>. Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the failure information given by the GSM network in text format.
<report>
Description characters The total number of characters, including line terminators, in the information text shall not exceed 2041 characters. Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>
106 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS 3.21 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality Description Command Possible Responses Set MS functionality AT+CFUN=[<fun>[,<rst>]]
Show the current setting AT+CFUN?
Show if the command is supported AT+CFUN=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
+CFUN: <fun>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s),(
list of supported
<rst>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
Selects the level of functionality <fun> in the MS. Level full functionality results in the highest level of power drawn. Minimum functionality results in the minimum power drawn. Manufacturers may also specify levels of functionality between these two end levels. When supported by manufacturers, ME resetting with the <rst> parameter may be utilized. Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound. Note!
AT+CFUN= is interpreted as AT+CFUN=0.
<fun>
Description 0 1 4 Minimum functionality. Default value. Note: The ME is turned off Full functionality. Note: If previously turned off, the phone is turned on Disable MS transmit and receive RF circuits Not Supported
<rst>
Description 0 1 Do not reset Reset the MS before setting it to <fun> power level LZT 123 7263 R1A 107 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 3.22 AT+CIND Indicator Control Description Command Possible Responses Set Indicator Control AT+CIND=[<ind>
[,<ind>[,]]]
Read the current setting AT+CIND?
Test if the command is supported AT+CIND=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CIND: <ind>,<ind>,
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)),
(<descr>,(list of supported
<ind>s)),
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Used to set the values of ME indicators. <ind> value 0 means that the indicator is off (or in state which can be identified as off state), 1 means that indicator is on (or in a state which is more substantial than off state), 2 is more substantial than 1, and so on. If the indicator is a simple on/off style element, it has values 0 and 1. The number of elements is ME specific. If the ME does not allow setting of indicators or it is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. If a certain indicator is not writable, it cannot be set. If the parameter is an empty field, the indicator will keep the previous value. Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a maximum 16 character description of the indicator and compound value is the allowed values for the indicator. If ME is not currently reachable,
+CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
<ind>
Description Integer type Value shall be in range of corresponding <descr>
<descr>
battchg signal Description Battery charge level (0-5) Not supported Signal quality (0-5) battery warning Battery warning (0-1) Not supported charger connected Charger connected (0-1) Not supported service sounder Service availability (0-1)
(Net contact status, 1 = Net contact) Sounder activity (0-1)
(ME silent status, 1 = ME silent) message Message received (0-1) 108 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS
<descr>
call vox roam sms full Description Call in progress (0-1) Transmit activated by voice activity (0-1). Not supported Roaming indicator (0-1)
(Home net status, 0 = Home Net) A short message memory storage in the MT has become full (1), or memory locations are available (0); i.e. the range is (0-1) 3.23 AT+CLAC List all available AT Commands Command
+CLAC
+CLAC=?
Possible Responses
<AT Command1> [<CR> <LF> <AT Command2>[]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CME ERROR: <err>
Causes the ME to return one or more lines of AT commands. Note!
This command only returns the AT commands that are available to the user. 3.24 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error Description Command Possible Responses Request GSM Mobile Equipment Error Control AT+CMEE=[<n>]
OK
ERROR Read the command AT+CMEE?
Show if the command is supported AT+CMEE=?
+CMEE: <n>
OK
ERROR
+CMEE: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
ERROR Disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. When enabled, ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result code instead of the regular ERROR final result code. ERROR is returned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, or TA functionality. LZT 123 7263 R1A 109 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<n>
Description 0 1 2 Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR instead. Default value Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric
<err> values (refer next subclause) Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose
<err> values (refer next subclause) 3.25 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting Description Command Possible Responses Set phone activity status AT+CMER=[<mode>
[,<keyp>[,<disp>
[,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Read the current setting AT+CMER?
Test if the command is supported AT+CMER=?
+CMER:
<mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,
<ind>,<bfr>
OK
ERROR
+CMER: (list of supported
<mode>s), (list of supported
<keyp>s), (list of supported
<disp>s), (list of supported
<ind>s), (list of supported
<bfr>s)
OK
ERROR Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes from ME to TE in the case of key pressings, display changes, and indicator state changes. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command. <bfr> controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1, 2 or 3 is entered. If the ME does not support setting, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
<mode>
Description 0 1 2 3 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result code buffer is full, codes can be buffered in some other place or the oldest ones can be discarded Not Supported Not Supported Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; TA-TE link specific inband technique used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<keyp>
Description 0 No keypad event reporting 110 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS
<disp>
Description 0 No display event reporting
<ind>
Description 0 1 2 No indicator event reporting Indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV:
<ind>,<value>. <ind> indicates the indicator order number
(as specified for +CIND) and <value> is the new value of indicator. Only those indicator events, which are not caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE Not Supported
<bfr>
Description 0 1 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when <mode> 1...3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes). Not Supported 3.26 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status Description Command Possible Responses Execute Phone Activity Status AT+CPAS[=<mode>]
Test if the command is supported AT+CPAS=?
+CPAS: <pas>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CPAS:
(list of supported
<pas>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate the ME before requesting action from the phone. When the command is executed without the <mode> argument, the command returns <pas>-values from 0 to 128 (for supported values se table 1 below). When, on the other hand, the command is executed with the <mode> argument set to 1, the command may return Ericsson specific <pas> values from 129 to 255 (for supported values see the table below). LZT 123 7263 R1A 111 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound value, refer GSM 07.07.
<pas>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6..127 129 130 131 Ready (ME allows commands from TA/TE) Unavailable (ME does not allow commands from TA/TE). Not Supported Unknown (ME is not guaranteed to respond to instructions). Not Supported Ringing (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the ringer is active) Call in progress (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but a call is in progress) Asleep (ME is unable to process commands from TA/TE because it is in a low functionality state). Not Supported All other values below 128 are reserved by ETS. Not Supported MMI is in idle state, (operator name/clock/date). This state is a sub-state to ready (0) and has the following definition:
MMI in Idle state, that is, operator, clock and date (is set) shown on the display No conversation or data call in progress No sub-menus shown on the display 4 Only digits, clear, *, NO and # allowed in this mode, not changing mode Mobile oriented call in progress. This is a sub-state to call in progress Mobile terminated call in progress. This is a sub-state to call in progress
<mode>
Description 1 Allows the CPAS to return Ericsson specific <pas> values, such as 129, 130 and 131 112 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS 3.27 AT+CPIN PIN Control Description Command Possible Responses Request PIN Control AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<new pin>]
+CME ERROR:
<err>
Show the current setting AT+CPIN?
Show if the command is supported AT+CPIN=?
OK
ERROR
+CPIN: <code>
+CME ERROR:
<err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR:
<err>
+CPIN: (supported
<code>s)
OK
ERROR Sends the password to the ME, which is necessary to make the ME operational (SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM). If the PIN is to be entered twice, the TA autonomously repeats the PIN. If no PIN request is pending, no action is taken towards the ME and an error message
(+CME ERROR <err>) is returned to the TE. If the PIN required is PUK, the second pin is required. This second PIN,
<newpin>, is used to replace the old PIN in the SIM. Note!
Commands which interact with the ME that are accepted when the ME has a pending request for SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM are: +CGMI,
+CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN, +CFUN, +CMEE +CPIN, L and M.
<pin>,<newpin>
Description string
<code>
READY SIM PIN SIM PUK The range for the SIM PIN and the PH- SIM PIN is 4 - 8 digits. The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits Description ME is not pending for any password ME is waiting SIM PIN to be given ME is waiting SIM PUK to be given LZT 123 7263 R1A 113 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<code>
Description PH-SIM PIN ME is waiting PHone-to-SIM card password to be given SIM PIN2 SIM PUK2 ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given. This <code> is recommended to be returned only when the last executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not entered correctly after the failure, it is recommended that ME does not block its operation ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given. This <code> is recommended to be returned only when the last executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication failure (i.e. +CME ERROR:18); if PUK2 and new PIN2 are not entered correctly after the failure, it is recommended that ME does not block its operation. BLOCKED The SIM cards is blocked for the user
<err>
Description 0 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 24 25 Phone failure PH-SIM PIN required SIM not inserted SIM PIN required SIM PUK required SIM failure SIM busy SIM wrong Incorrect password Text string too long Invalid characters in text string 100 Unknown 114 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS 3.28 AT+CPWD Change Password Description Command Possible Responses Request facility lock AT+CPWD=<fac>,<old pwd>,<newpwd>
Show if the command is supported AT+CPWD=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CPWD:
(<fac1>,<pwdlength 1>),
(<fac2>,<pwdlength 2>),
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command Facility Lock +CLCK. Test command returns a list of pairs which present the available facilities and the maximum length of their password.
<fac >
CS PS SC P2 AO OI AI IR OX NT NM NS NA Description CNTRL (lock control surface e.g. phone keyboard). Not supported PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when other than current SIM card inserted) SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up and when this lock command issued) SIM PIN2 BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1) BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1) BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2) BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2) BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to Home Country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1) barr incoming calls from numbers Not stored to TA memory. Not supported barr incoming calls from numbers Not stored to ME memory. Not supported barr incoming calls from numbers Not stored to SIM memory. Not supported barr incoming calls from numbers Not stored in Any memory. Not supported LZT 123 7263 R1A 115 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<fac >
Description AB AG AC FD All Barring services (refer GSM 02.30) All outGoing barring services (refer GSM 02.30) All inComing barring services (refer GSM 02.30) SIM fixed dialling memory feature. If PIN2 authentication has not been carried out during the current session, PIN2 is required as <passwd>). Not supported
<oldpwd>
Description string type
<oldpwd> shall be the same as password specified for the facility from the ME user interface or with the change password command, +CPWD
<newpwd>
Description string type
<newpwd> is the new password, maximum length of password can be determined with <pwdlength>
<pwdlength>
Description Integer type Maximum length of the password for the facility
<err>
Description 0 3 5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 23 24 Phone failure Operation not allowed PH-SIM PIN required SIM not inserted SIM PIN required SIM PUK required SIM failure SIM busy SIM wrong Incorrect password SIM PIN2 required SIM PUK2 required Text string too long Invalid characters in text string 100 Unknown 101..255 Reserved by ETS 116 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS 3.29 AT+CR Service Reporting Control Description Command Possible Responses Set Service Reporting Control AT+CR=<mode>
Read current setting AT+CR?
Test if the command is supported AT+CR=?
OK
ERROR
+CR: <mode>
OK
ERROR
+CR: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
ERROR Enables or disables display of intermediate bearer capability reports during the handshake phase.
<mode>
Description 0 1 Disable reporting. Default value Enable reporting 3.30 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code Description Command Possible Responses Set Cellular Result Code option Show the current setting AT+CRC=[<mode>]
AT+CRC?
Show if the command is supported AT+CRC=?
OK
ERROR
+CRC: <mode>
OK
ERROR
+CRC: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
ERROR Controls whether or not the extended format of incoming call indication is used. When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
< mode>
Description 0 1 Disables extended format Enables extended format LZT 123 7263 R1A 117 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 3.31 AT+CSAS Save Settings Description Command Possible Responses Save Settings AT+CSAS[=<profile>]
Get available profiles AT+CSAS=?
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CSAS: (list of supported
<profile>s)
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Saves active message service settings to a non-volatile memory. A TA can contain several settings profiles. Settings specified in commands Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are saved. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. SIM SMS parameters) and therefore can not be saved. Test command shall display the supported profile numbers for reading and writing of settings.
< profile >
Description 0..255 Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are to be stored. Default is 0. 3.32 AT+CSQ Signal Strength Description Execute Signal Strength Command AT+CSQ Test if the command is supported AT+CSQ=?
Possible Responses
+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CSQ: (list of supported
<rssi>s),(list of supported <ber>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Returns the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit error rate <ber> from the ME. Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values. 118 LZT 123 7263 R1A 3. CONTROL AND STATUS
<rssi>
Description 0 1 2..30 31 99
-113dBm or less
-111dBm
-109 53dBm
-51dBm or greater Not known or not detectable
<ber>
Description 0..7 99 As RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08 [0] subclause 8.2.4 Not known or not detectable 3.33 AT+CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update Description Command Possible Responses Enable and disable automatic time zone update via NITZ AT+CTZU=<onoff>
Read current setting AT+CTZU?
Show if the command is supported AT+CTZU=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CTZU: <onoff>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CTZU: (list of supported <onoff>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Enables and disables the automatic time zone update via NITZ. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR <err> is returned.
<onoff>
Description 0 1 The automatic time zone update is disabled (off) The automatic time zone update is enabled (on) LZT 123 7263 R1A 119 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 120 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. Audio Note!
*E2EAMS and *E2APR are new commands that replace the funtionality offered by the *EALR, *EAMS, *EARS and *ELAM commands. Use the new commands in new applications. The old commands are included for compatibility. 4.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification Description Command Possible Responses Request operation with audio profile
ERROR
OK AT*E2EAMS= <op>[,<TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>,<SideToneGain>,
<AuxInGain>,<MicInGain>,
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,
<MaxVolume>,<MicPath>,
<SpkPath>,<TxPCM>,
<RxPCM>,<HFAlgorithm>,
<LocalAudio>,<TxGainLow>,
<MicVolt2V>,<SideTone>,
<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,
<AnalogRing>,][,<val>]]
Display set profile AT*E2EAMS?
Show if the command is supported AT*E2EAMS=?
*E2EAMS: <TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>,
<SideToneGain>,
<AuxInGain>,
<MicInGain>,
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,
<MaxVolume>,
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,
<HFAlgorithm>,
<LocalAudio>,
<TxGainLow>,
<MicVolt2V>,
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,
<EchoCancel>,
<AnalogRing>
ERROR
*E2EAMS:
(list of supported <op>s)
ERROR This command allows the modification and configuration of the current audio profile. An audio profile is a set of data which uniquely defines the way in which the audio paths, gains, DSP algorithms and switch setting are configured. There are several audio profiles available in non-volatile storage, and the current profile can be modified by use of the AT*E2APR command. The AT*E2EAMS command allows the user to:
LZT 123 7263 R1A 121 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
configure the whole profile, specifying each audio parameter in a comma separated list;
set a single parameter, given by its parameter number;
save the current profile to non-volatile memory under the current profile number (see AT*E2APR). The current audio settings can also be displayed by running the read command AT*E2EAMS?
Default audio settings are given in AT*E2APR. Abortability:
This command may not be aborted. Refer to the diagram below to understand which parts of the audio circuit are affected by the various parameters. CODEC ATMS AuxInGain TxPCM TxPGA TxGainLow PCMOUT PCMULD MicPath switches MICP MICN MicInGain SideTone Gain SideTone switch DSP Speech decoder F/R Handsfree EchoCancel NoiseRed Aux Amp BEARP BEARN Ear Amp SpkPath switches RxPCM RxPGA Volume PCMIN PCMDLD Encoder F/R Figure 4.1 Audio diagram of the CODEC 122 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO
<op>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Configure current profile (<pr1> to <pr21>) Set <TxPGA>
Set <RxPGA>
Set <SideToneGain>
Set <AuxInGain>
Set <MicInGain>
Set <TxAGC>
Set <Volume>
Set <MaxVolume>
Set <MicPath>
Set <SpkPath>
Set <TxPCM>
Set <RxPCM>
Set <HFAlgorithm>
Set <LocalAudio>
Set <TxGainLow>
Set <MicVolt2V>
Set <SideTone>
Set <NoiseRed>
Set <EchoCancel>
Set <AnalogRing>
255 Save current profile to non-volatile storage at current profile number
<TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>
Description 0 1 2 3
-5dB PGA gain
-2.5dB PGA gain 0dB PGA gain 2.5dB PGA gain LZT 123 7263 R1A 123 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>
Description 4 5 6 7 5dB PGA gain 7.5dB PGA gain
-7.5dB PGA gain
-10dB PGA gain
<SideToneGain>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 10dB 13dB 16dB 19dB 22dB 25dB
<AuxInputGain>
Description 0 1 2 3 MUTE 13dB 34dB 46dB
<MicInputGain>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 MUTE 13dB 25dB 34dB 46dB
<TxAGCGain>
Description 0 1 2 0dB 3dB 6dB 124 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO
<Volume>,
<MaxVolume>
Description 0 1-9 MUTE Volume levels 1-9
<MicPath>,
<SpkPath>
Description 0 1 2 3 OFF MUTE Internal (using microphone/speaker) External (using ATMS/AFMS)
<TxPCM>,
<RxPCM>
0 1 Description 13bit PCM 16bit PCM
<HFAlgorithm>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 No handsfree Advanced handsfree Switching handsfree No handsfree handheld No handsfree external
<LocalAudio>
Description 0 1 2 3 Local audio mode off Local audio microphone/no speaker Local audio no microphone/speaker Local audio microphone/speaker
<TxGainLow>
Description 0 1 Tx gain normal Tx gain -7dB LZT 123 7263 R1A 125 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<MicVolt2V>
Description 0 1 Microphone voltage at 2.5V Microphone voltage at 2V Description
<SideTone>,
<NoiseRed>,
<EchoCancel>,
<AnalogRing>
0 1 OFF ON Examples AT*E2EAMS=?
*E2EAMS=(0-21,255) OK Current default profile is 0:
AT*E2EAMS?
*E2EAMS: 2,2,3,2,3,2,5,9,3,3,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1 OK Sets current profile with these settings:
AT*E2EAMS=0,2,1,2,0,0,2,5,9,2,2,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1 OK Sets TxPGA gain to 0dB:
AT*E2EAMS=1,2 OK Turns analog ringing off:
AT*E2EAMS=20,0 OK Save current profile to currently loaded profile in non-volatile memory:
AT*E2EAMS=255 OK 126 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO 4.2 AT*E2APR M2M Audio Profile Manipulation Description Command Possible Responses Request operation with audio profile AT*E2APR=
<op>[,<prnum1>
[,<prnum2>]]
ERROR
OK
*E2APR: <TxPGA>,<RxPGA>,
<SideToneGain>,<AuxInGain>,
<MicInGain>,<TxAGC>,
<Volume>,<MaxVolume>,
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,
<HFAlgorithm>,<LocalAudio>,
<TxGainLow>,<MicVolt2V>,
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,
<EchoCancel>,<AnalogRing>
OK Display currently set profile AT*E2APR?
*E2APR: current <prnum>
ERROR Shows if the command is supported AT*E2APR=?
*E2APR: (list of supported
<op>s), (list of supported
<prnum1>s), (list of supported
<prnum2>s)
ERROR This command allows the maniuplation and storage of the audio profiles stored in the MS. The requirement for the 2nd and 3rd parameters depend on the operation being carried out. Using the command you can:
Set one of the three audio profiles 0, 1 or 2 as the current profile. This will load the profile's settings from NVM and implement them.
Read one of the audio profiles. The current settings for the profile number defined will be displayed.
Copy all parameters from one profile into another.
Reset any of the profiles. This will reinstate the factory defaults for the profile:
- 0 is the handset profile,
- 1 is the portable handsfree profile,
- 2 is the car kit profile.
Set a profile as the default profile on next power up.
<op>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 Set profile <prnum1> to set as current Read profile <prnum1> settings Copy profile <prnum1> to <prnum2>
Reset profile <prnum1> to factory default Set default profile as <prnum1>. Will store this as defautl profile in NVM, and use it as default from next power on LZT 123 7263 R1A 127 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<prnum1>,
<prnum2>
Description 0 1 2 Profile 0 (Factory profile set for handset). Default Profile 1 (Factory profile set for portable handsfree) Profile 2 (Factory profile set for car kit) Examples AT*E2APR=?
*E2APR= (0-4),(0-2),(0-2) OK Current default profile is profile 0:
AT*E2APR?
*E2APR: 0 OK Set audio profile now used to profile 1:
AT*E2APR=0,1 OK Audio profile 1 settings:
AT*E2APR=1,1
*E2APR: 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0 OK Copy audio profile 1 to audio profile 2:
AT*E2APR=2,1,2 OK Reset audio profile 1 with factory default - this also resets the current audio paths to the new profile as 1 is currently used:
AT*E2APR=3,1 OK Sets profile number 1 as the default when module is powered on:
AT*E2APR=4,1 OK 128 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO 4.3 AT*EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request Description Command Possible Responses Request the audio lines
(ATMS,AFMS) AT*EALR=<mode>[,<ac tivation>[,<aud_status>
Show the current setting AT*EALR?
Show list of supported parameters AT*EALR=?
*EALR: <mode>,
<activation>,<resp>
OK
ERROR
*EALR:
<mode>,<activation>,
<resp>
*EALR:(list of supported
<mode>s,
<activation>s and
<aud_status>s parameters) The AT*EALR command is used by accessories to request the ATMS and AFMS. The command includes two parameters; <mode> and
<activation>. The <mode> parameter sets which audio lines are requested and the <activation> parameter is used to indicate if the accessory wants to be activated directly or not. Direct activation means the accessory gets the audio lines immediately if a call is established from the MS (i.e. keypad, voice recognition). If the accessory doesn't request direct activation, it has to indicate to the MS when it wants to get the audio lines (e.g. using AT commands). The <audio status> parameter is used to demand the audio lines. This command enables the unsolicited result code
*EALV:<mode>,<activation>,<resp> which is sent to the application when the module wants it to change audio state.
<mode >
Description 0 1 2 3 No request for ATMS or AFMS Request ATMS and not AFMS Request AFMS and not ATMS Request ATMS and AFMS
<activation >
Description 0 1 Not direct activated audio accessory (e.g. cordless portable hands free) Direct activated audio accessory (e.g. vehicle hands free) LZT 123 7263 R1A 129 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<aud_status >
Description 0 1 2 No change of the audio status Audio hand over. Accessory hands over control of both the audio lines and the call to the phone Audio demand. Accessory demands control of both the audio lines and the call
<resp >
Description 0 1 2 3 Disable ATMS and AFMS Enable ATMS and disable AFMS Disable ATMS and enable AFMS Enable ATMS and AFMS 4.4 AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Selection Description Command Possible Responses Sets the audio mode for the application
OK
ERROR AT*EAMS=<internal_voice_al g>[,<noise_reduction>
[,<side tone>
[,<short_echo_canceling>
[,<ATMS_gain>
[,<class>
[,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation _from_class>
[,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation _from_class>]]]]]]]
Show the current audio mode setting AT*EAMS?
Show list of supported services AT*EAMS=?
*EAMS:<internal_voice_alg
>, <noise_reduction>,
<side_tone>,
<short_echo_canceling>,
<AFMS_gain>,<class>,<AT MS_sensitivity_deviation_fr om_class>,<AFMS_sensitivi ty_deviation_from_class>
*EAMS: (list of supported
<internal_voice_alg >s,
<noise_reduction>s,
<side_tone>s,
<short_echo_canceling>s,
<AFMS_gain>s>,
<class>s,
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviatio n_from_class>s,
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviatio n_from_class>s) Set the Audio mode selection. The command must be sent to the MS at the initialization of an audio accessory, but can also be sent later to change the audio mode selection. The command includes the following parameters:
<internal_voice_alg> sets the voice-processing mode in the phone. 130 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO
<noise_reduction> sets the noise reduction functionality in the phone.
<side tone> activates the side tone functionality in the phone.
<short_echo_canceling> sets the short echo canceling functionality in the phone.
<ATMS_gain> indicates the gain of the signal that is sent to the phone.
<class> indicates the Hands Free class. The class parameter is used to fine adjust some parameters in the internal voice algorithm.
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class> indicates the ATMS sensitivity deviation from a given class. This parameter is used, for example if an HF product of a certain class has a new microphone that is more sensitive than the old one.
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class> indicates the AFMS sensitivity deviation from a given class. This parameter is used, for example if an HF product of a certain class has a new speaker that is more sensitive than the old one. The last three parameters in this command (i.e. <class>,
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>,
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>) are included to give the internal voice algorithm additional information to perform optimally. It is up to the MS to decide how this additional information is used.
<internal_voice_alg>
Description 0 1 2 None Semi Duplex Full Duplex
(Note! the internal hands free algorithm in the MS contains echo cancelling) Note!
<noise_reduction>
Description 0 1 Off On
<side_tone>
Description 0 1 Off On
<short_echo_canceling>
Description 0 1 Off On LZT 123 7263 R1A 131 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<ATMS_gain>
Description 0 1 Normal (0 dB) (internal voice processing) 12 dB from accessory (external voice processing). Not supported
<Class>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 None Low end, class reference Hector Mid End, class reference Scott High End, class reference Hasse Large room, class reference Office Hands free. Not supported
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>,
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 0 dB 2,5 dB
-2,5 dB 5,0 dB
-5,0 dB 4.5 AT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal Description Command Possible Responses Request analogue ring signal in the loudspeaker AT*EARS=<mode>
OK
ERROR Show the current mode setting AT*EARS?
*EARS: <mode>
Show list of supported modes AT*EARS=?
*EARS: (list of supported <mode>s) Used to enable an analogue ring signal as indication of an incoming call in an external loudspeaker (AFMS). The <mode> parameter activates and deactivates the service.
<mode >
Description 0 1 Disable analogue ring signal Enable analogue ring signal 132 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO 4.6 AT*E2PHFB Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable Description Command Possible Responses Set PHF functionality AT*E2PHFB=<op>
ERROR
OK Display current setting AT*E2PHFB?
*E2PHFB: <op>
Show if the command is supported AT*E2PHFB=?
*E2PHFB: (list of supported <op>s
ERROR This command allows the user to set the functionality for a PHF
(portable handsfree) button, as used on simple handsfree equipment. When set to ON, the MS will detect the shortcircuit of the ATMS and AFMS lines, and interpret this as a PHF button press. This has the effect of answering/hanging up a call without recourse to AT commands.
<op>
Description 0 1 Disable PHF button. Default setting Enable PHF button 4.7 AT*ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set local audio mode AT*ELAM=<mic>[,<loud speaker>]
Show the current service setting AT*ELAM?
Show list of supported parameters AT*ELAM=?
*ELAM:
<mic>,<loudspeaker
OK
ERROR
*ELAM:
<mic>,<loudspeaker>
*ELAM: (list of supported <mic>s and
<loudspeaker>s parameters) Used to route the microphone and/or the loudspeaker signal to the system bus. This function is used when the audio information is to be communicated over the system bus rather than the GSM radio. This functionality can be used by an MC link accessory that communicates with a PSTN adapter.
<mic>
Description 0 1 2 Off Microphone analogue Microphone digital. Not supported LZT 123 7263 R1A 133 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<loudspeaker>
Description 0 1 2 Off Loudspeaker analogue Loudspeaker digital. Not supported 4.8 AT*EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode Description Command Possible Responses Enables/disables the phone microphone AT*EMIC=<mode>
Test if the command is supported, show supported values AT*EMIC=?
Read the current settings AT*EMIC?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EMIC: (list of supported
<mode>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EMIC: <mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR The command enables/disables the microphone in the module. The microphone should be enabled for each new call, even if it was disabled for the previous call.
<mode>
Description 0 1 Microphone is disabled (off) Microphone is enabled (on) 4.9 AT*EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request Description Command Possible Responses Request for mute indications AT*EMIR=<mode>
OK
ERROR Show supported message types along with the current service setting AT*EMIR?
*EMIR: <mode>,<resp>
Show list of supported services AT*EMIR=?
*EMIR: (list of supported
<mode>s) This command is used to request music mute indications. 134 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO A music mute indication is sent to all accessories that have requested the indication when an incoming event (a phone call, an SMS, an e-mail etc.), with an associated audio prompt (beep, melody, etc.), is received by the phone or an internal event such as a calendar event, with an associated audio prompt occurs. The music mute indication is also sent out when the voice recognition mechanism is activated. The only exception to this is when the Magic Word function is active, as the ASR is then capable of recognising a
(predefined) keyword despite background noise. After the event (when the call has been disconnected, the new mail signal has sounded etc.), or when the voice recognition mechanism is deactivated, a new music mute indication with the <resp> parameter set to zero is sent. Note!
The phone shall send the system sound that corresponds to the incoming event (phone conversation, new mail signal etc.) over the system bus.
<mode >
Description 0 1 Off, music mute indication result codes will not be sent to the accessory On, music mute indication result codes will be sent to the accessory
<resp >
Description 0 1 Music mute inactive Music mute active LZT 123 7263 R1A 135 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 4.10 AT*EPRR Ericsson Personal Ring Type Read Description Command Possible Responses Read phone number and ring type AT*EPRR=<indexr>
Show if the command is supported AT*EPRR=?
*EPRR:
<indexr>,<number>,
<type>,<sound type>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
*EPRR: (list of supported
<indexr>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Returns phone number, phone number type and sound type in location number <indexr>. If listing fails an error, +CME ERROR: <err>, is returned.
<indexr>
Description 1-50 Value of location number
<number>
Description string type Phone number of format <type>
<type>
Description integer format Type of address octet
(refer GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7) 128 129 145 161 Unknown numbering plan, national / international number unknown ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / international unknown ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number 128 - 255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7
<sound type>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 Off. Not supported Low ring signal Medium ring signal High ring signal Mixed ring signal 136 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO
<sound type>
Description 5 6 7 8 9-10 11 12-20 21-30 31-38 39-50 Beep. Not supported Alarm. Not supported Calendar Tone. Not supported Calendar Click. Not supported Reserved. Not supported Melody 1 Melody 2. Melody 10 reserved for pre-set melodies Reserved for melody 11-20. Not supported Own melody 1-8 Reserved for own melodies. Not supported 4.11 AT*EPRW Ericsson Personal Ringtype Write Description Command Possible Responses Request Personal Ringtype Write command AT*EPRW=<indexr>,
<number>,[<type>],
<soundtype>
Show if the command is supported AT*EPRW=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
*EPRW: (list of supported
<indexr>s),<nlength
>,(list of supported
<type>s),(list of supported <sound type>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Writes phone number, phone number type and sound type in location number <indexr>. It is possible to use wild cards for phone number by substituting the digits with question marks. If writing fails an error,
+CME ERROR: <err>, is returned. If all parameters but <indexr> are omitted, the personal ring type at position <indexr> will be deleted.
<indexr>
Description 1-50 Value of location number. The location number must be free. If the given location number is not free, ERROR is returned
<number>
Description string type phone number of format <type>
LZT 123 7263 R1A 137 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<type>
Description Integer format Type of address octet
(refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7) 128 129 145 161 Unknown numbering plan, national/international number unknown ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international number unknown ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number 128 - 255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7
<nlength>
Description integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
<sound type>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9-10 11 12-30 31-38 39-50 Off. Not supported Low ring signal Medium ring signal High ring signal Mixed ring signal Beep. Not supported Alarm. Not supported Calendar Tone. Not supported Calendar Click. Not supported Reserved. Not supported Melody 1 Melody 2. Melody 20 reserved for pre-set melodies Own melody 1-8 Reserved for own melodies. Not supported 138 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO 4.12 AT*ERIL Ericsson Ring Level Set Description Command Possible Responses AT*ERIL=<volume>[,<c all type>
[,<place>]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Sets ring volume for the ring signals used for incoming voice (L1 and L2), fax and data calls Read the settings of volume for the ring signals AT*ERIL?
Test if the command is supported AT*ERIL=?
*ERIL:
<volume1>[,<call type1> [,<place1>
[<CR><LF>*ERIL:
<volume n>[, <call type n> [,<place n>]]]]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ERIL: (list of supported
<volume>s)[,(list of supported <call type>s)
[,(list of supported
<place>s)]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Used to set the volume for the ring signals used for incoming voice, Line 1, Line 2, fax and data calls. The parameter <place> controls the ring level set for different types of modes. The signal volume is specified as step, with an increasing volume for each signal, or as a selected level. Line 1 is the default for <call type> if the parameter is not given.
<volume>
Description 0 1-6 Off Volume setting, not increasing ring 129-134 Volume setting, increasing ring
<calltype>
Description 1 2 3 4 5 Line 1 Line 2 Fax Data Alarm. Not supported LZT 123 7263 R1A 139 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<place>
Description 0 1 Hand held Car mounted 4.13 AT*ERIN Ericsson Ring Set Description Command Possible Responses Sets ring type for incoming voice (L1 and L2), fax and data calls and alarm Read the settings of ring type and volume for the call types AT*ERIN=
<sound type>,
[<call type>]
AT*ERIN?
Test if the command is supported AT*ERIN=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ERIN: <sound type1>,<call type1>
[<CR><LF>*ERIN:
<sound type n>,<call type n>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ERIN: list of supported <sound type>s, list of supported <call type>s
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Used to set sound for incoming voice, line L1 and L2, fax, data calls and alarm. For each of the incoming call types and alarm: voice on line 1, voice on line 2, fax calls and data calls and alarm a sound type is selected. The type of sound is either a ring signal, selected from a predefined set, a melody, selected from a predefined set, or an own melody, selected from a set specified by the user. Line 1 is the default for <call type> if the parameter is not given.
<call type>
Description 1 2 3 4 5 Line 1 Line 2 Fax Data Alarm 140 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO
<sound type>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9-10 11-20 21-30 31-38 39-5 Off. Not supported Low ring signal Medium ring signal High ring signal Mixed ring signal Beep. Not supported Alarm. Not supported Calendar Tone. Not supported Calendar Click. Not supported Reserved. Not supported Melody 1. Melody 10 reserved for preset melodies Reserved. Not supported Own melodies 1-8 Reserved for own melodies. Not supported 4.14 AT*ERIP Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command Description Command Possible Responses Plays the selected sound type at specified volume level AT*ERIP =
<volume>,<sound type>
Test if the command is supported AT*ERIP=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ERIP: (list of supported
<volume>s),(list of supported <sound type>s)
OK
ERROR Used to play one of the sound types which are available as ring signals/
message signals on the module. The signal volume may not be chosen as step; with an increasing volume for each signal. If value 1 is chosen for parameter <volume>, nothing should happen. Signal volume may be chosen as a selected level.
<volume>
Description 0 1 2-n Off Step. Not Supported Volume setting Refer to the AT*ERIN command for the <sound type> parameter. LZT 123 7263 R1A 141 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 4.15 AT*ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound Description Command Possible Responses Sets the answer mode settings in the MS AT*ESAM=<mode>
Read the current setting AT*ESAM?
Test if the command is supported AT*ESAM=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESAM: <mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESAM: list of supported <mode>s
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
<mode >
Description 0 1 2 Answer mode is not set to Any key, or Auto (off) Any Key mode on Auto mode on 4.16 AT*ESOM Ericsson Settings Own Melody Description Command Possible Responses Sets the own melodies in the MS AT*ESOM=
[<melody index>],
<melody string>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Shows the current settings, i.e. the currently stored melodies AT*ESOM?
Shows if the command is supported AT*ESOM=?
*ESOM: <melody index>
,<melody string 1>, <CR><LF>
*ESOM: <melody index>,
<melody string n>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESOM: (list of supported
<melody index>),(list of supported <pause>s),(list of supported <prefix>s),(list of supported <tone>s),
<mlength>,<mtones>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Sets the user defined own melodies in the MS. The <prefix> and <tone>
indicates together the tone frequency and duration. The <pause> sets a pause between tones. 142 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO Test command returns the possible values of <melody index>, <pause>,
<prefix>, <tone>, <mlength> and <mtones>.
<melody index>
1-4
<melody string>
string Description Melody 1 4. Default setting: 1 Description A sequence of <tones> and <pause> entries. The <tones>
may be preceded by one or two <prefix>(s)
<pause>
Description p Pause
<prefix>
Description
(b)
Half tone higher Half tone lower One octave higher
<tones>
Description c,d,e,f,g,a,b Short tones C,D,E,F,G,A,B Long tones
<mtones>
Description integer Indicating the maximum number of tones in a melody
<mlength>
Description integer Indicating the maximum length of <melody string>
LZT 123 7263 R1A 143 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 4.17 AT*EXVC Ericsson SET External Volume Control Description Command Possible Responses Sets the maximum volume level on the audio lines Test if the command is supported and show the possible report settings AT*EXVC=<external volume>
AT*EXVC=?
Read the current setting AT*EXVC?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EXVC: (list of supported <external volume>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EXVC: <external volume>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Used to set or query whether an external accessory such as the vehicle handsfree controls the audio volume. By default, the <external volume> is turned off, i.e. the volume over AFMS is controlled by the phone MMI. The set command is effective only as long as the phone senses that it is connected to an external accessory that has issued the command. Once the phone and the accessory are disconnected the <external volume>
setting returns to default.
<external volume>
Description 0 1 The phone MMI controls audio volume over AFMS Audio volume over AFMS is output at maximum level that is no clipping occurs. An external accessory such as a vehicle kit controls the actual volume level heard by the user 144 LZT 123 7263 R1A 4. AUDIO 4.18 ATM Monitor Speaker Control Description Syntax Possible Responses Set monitor speaker control Read the current setting Show if the command is supported ATM[=][<speaker>]
ATM?
ATM=?
OK
ERROR M: <speaker>
M: (list of supported
<speaker>s) Define the activity of the speaker. This command is ignored by the modem and is only included for compatibility.
<speaker>
Description 0 1-3 Off during the entire call. Default value Different on modes LZT 123 7263 R1A 145 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 146 LZT 123 7263 R1A 5. Data - CSD/HSCSD 5.1 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type Description Command Possible Responses Select bearer service type AT+CBST=[<speed>,[<n ame>,[<ce>]]]
OK
ERROR Read the command AT+CBST?
Test if the command is supported AT+CBST=?
+CBST:
<speed>,<name>,<
ce>
OK
ERROR
+CBST: (list of supported
<speed>s,list of supported <name>s, list of supported
<ce>s)
OK
ERROR Selects the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and the connection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated. Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup, especially in the case of single numbering scheme calls. Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values.
<speed>
Description 0 4 6 7 12 14 15 16 68 70 71 75 Auto selection of baud rate 2400bps V.22bis 4800bps V.32 9600bps V.32 9600bps V.34 14400bps V.34 19200bps V.34 28800bps V.34 2400bps V.110 (ISDN) 4800bps V.110 (ISDN) 9600bps V.110 (ISDN) 14400bps V.110 (ISDN) LZT 123 7263 R1A 147 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<speed>
Description 79 80 81 82 83 19200bps V.110 (ISDN) 28800bps V.110 (ISDN) 38400bps V.110 (ISDN) 48000bps V.110 (ISDN) 56000bps V.110 (ISDN)
<name>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Asynchronous connection (UDI or 3.1kHz modem) Data circuit synchronous (UDI or 3.1kHz modem). Not supported PAD Access (Asynchronous) (UDI). Not supported Packet access (synchronous) (UDI). Not supported Data circuit asynchronous (RDI). Not supported Data circuit synchronous (RDI). Not supported PAD Access (Asynchronous) (RDI). Not supported Packet access (synchronous) (RDI). Not supported
<ce>
Description 0 1 2 3 transparent. Not supported Non transparent Both, transparent preferred. Not supported Both, non-transparent preferred. Not supported 148 LZT 123 7263 R1A 5. DATA - CSD/HSCSD 5.2 AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol Description Command Possible Responses Set radio link protocol Read the command AT+CRLP=[<iws>
[,<mws>[,<T1>
[,<N2>[,<ver>
[, <T4>]]]]]]
AT+CRLP?
Test if the command is supported AT+CRLP=?
OK
ERROR
+CRLP:
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver1>
[,<T4>]][<CR><LF>
+CRLP:
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver2>
[,<T4>]][...]]
OK
ERROR
+CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s),
(list of supported <mws>s),
(list of supported <T1>s),
(list of supported<N2>s)[,<ver1>
[,(list of supported <T4>s)]]
[<CR><LF>+CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s), (list of supported <mws>s), (list of supported <T1>s), (list of supported <N2>s)[,<ver2>[,(list of supported <T4>s)]][...]]
OK
ERROR Radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data calls are originated may be altered with this command. Available command subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented by the device (e.g. <ver> may not be available if device supports only versions 0 and 1). Note!
If radio link protocol is not used, but some other error correcting protocol (for transparent data calls), V.25ter [4] Error Control Selection test command +ES=? may be used to indicate the presence of the protocol. Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version
<verx>. Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding <verx>
are returned. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. If ME/TA supports several RLP versions <verx>, the RLP parameter value ranges for each <verx> are returned in a separate line.
<iws>
120 0 - 496 Description IWF to MS window size LZT 123 7263 R1A 149 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<mws>
120 0 - 496
<T1>
48 38 - 100
<N2>
6 0 - 255
<T4>
5 3 - 255
<ver>
Integer Description MS to IWF window size Description Acknowledgment timer T1 (*10ms) Description Re-transmission attempts N2 Description Re-sequencing period T4 (*10ms) Description RLP version. When version indication is not present,
<ver>=0 is assumed 150 LZT 123 7263 R1A 6. Data - GPRS 6.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate Description Command Possible Responses Activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s)
+CGACT=[<state>
[,<cid>[,<cid>[,]]]]
Read the command
+CGACT?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CGACT: <cid>,
<state>[<CR><LF>+
CGACT: <cid>,
<state>[...]]
OK
ERROR Test if the command is supported
+CGACT=?
+CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK
ERROR Used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s). After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored and OK is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, ERROR or +CME: ERROR is returned. If the MS is not attached to the GPRS service when the activation form of the command is executed, the MS first performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specific contexts. If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates all defined contexts. If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command deactivates all active contexts.
<state>
Description 0 1 PDP context activation deactivated PDP context activation activated
<cid>
Description Integer type A numeric parameter which specifies a specific PDP context definition LZT 123 7263 R1A 151 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 6.2 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach Description Command Possible Responses Attach or detach MS to the GPRS/packet domain/packet domain service
+CGATT=[<state>]
Read the command
+CGATT?
Test if the command is supported
+CGATT=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CGATT: <state>
OK
ERROR
+CGATT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK
ERROR Used to attach the MS to, or detach the MS from, the GPRS/packet domain service. After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses (enabled by the +CMEE command) are listed in subclause 1.2.3. Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to detached. Note!
This command has the characteristics of both the V.250 action and parameter commands. Hence it has the read form in addition to the execution/set and test forms.
<state>
Description 0 1 Detached Attached 152 LZT 123 7263 R1A 6. DATA - GPRS 6.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State Description Command Possible Responses Establish GPRS/packet domain connection
+CGDATA=[<L2p>,[cid
[,cid>[,]]]]
CONNECT
ERROR
OK
ERROR Test if the command is supported
+CGDATA=?
+CGDATA: (list of supported <L2P>s)
OK
ERROR Causes the MS to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish communication between the TE and the network using one or more GPRS/packet domain PDP types. This may include performing a GPRS/packet domain attach and one or more PDP context activations.
<L2P>
PPP M-xxxx Description Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IP Manufacturer specific protocol (xxx is an alphanumeric string) LZT 123 7263 R1A 153 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context Description Command Possible Responses Select PDP context parameters
+CGDCONT=[<cid>
[,<PDP_type> [,<APN>
[,<PDP_addr>
[,<d_comp>
[,<h_comp> [,<pd1>
[,[,pdN]]]]]]]]]
Read the command
+CGDCONT?
Test if the command is supported
+CGDCONT=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CGDCONT: <cid>,
<PDP_type>,<APN>,
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,[,pdN]]]
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:
<cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>,
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,[,pdN]]]
OK
ERROR
+CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s),
<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)
[,(list of supported <pd1>s)
[,[,(list of supported
<pdN>s)]]]
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:
(range of supported <cid>s),
<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)
[,(list of supported
<pd1>s)[,[,(list of supported
<pdN>s)]]] [...]]
OK
ERROR Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>.
<cid>
Description Integer type
(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in other PDP context-related commands. The range of permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the test form of the command 1-10 Supported values. Ericsson specific
<PDP_type>
Description X25 IP OSPIH PPP ITU-T/CCITT X.25 layer 3. Not supported Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5) Internet Hosted Octet Stream Protocol. Not supported Point to Point Protocol (IETF STD 51). Not supported 154 LZT 123 7263 R1A 6. DATA - GPRS
<APN>
Description String type
(Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical name that is used to select the GGSN or the external packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be requested
<PDP_address>
Description String type A string parameter that identifies the MS in the address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing that, a dynamic address will be requested
<d_comp>
Description 0 1 PDP data compression OFF PDP data compression ON 2..255 Reserved
<h_comp>
Description 0 1 PDP header compression OFF PDP header compression ON 2..255 Reserved
<pdN>
Description String type Zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specific to the <PDP_type>
LZT 123 7263 R1A 155 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 6.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting Description Command Possible Responses Set command
+CGEREP=[<mode>[,<
bfr>]]
Read the command
+CGEREP?
Test if the command is supported
+CGEREP=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CGEREP:
<mode>,<bfr>
OK
ERROR
+CGEREP: (list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)
OK
ERROR Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV:
XXX from MS to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the GPRS/packet domain MS or the network.
<mode>
Description 0 1
<bfr>
0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MS. No codes are forwarded to the TE Discard unsolicited result codes when MS-TE link is reserved; otherwise forward them directly to the TE Description MS buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered 156 LZT 123 7263 R1A 6. DATA - GPRS 6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address Description Command Possible Responses Show PDP addresses for specified CIDs
+CGPADDR=[<cid>
[,<cid> [,]]]
Test if the command is supported
+CGPADDR=?
+CGPADDR:
<cid>,<PDP_addr>
[<CR><LF>+CGPAD DR:
<cid>,<PDP_addr>
OK
ERROR
+CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)
OK
ERROR Returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. The test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.
<cid>
Description Integer type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> is specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned
<PDP_address>
Description String type A string that identifies the MS in the address space applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by the +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands when the context was defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one assigned during the last PDP context activation that used the context definition referred to by <cid>. <PDP_address> is omitted if none is available LZT 123 7263 R1A 157 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 6.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) Description Command Possible Responses Set minimum acceptable profile
+CGQMIN=[<cid>
[,<precedence>
[,<delay> [,<reliability>
[,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Read the command
+CGQMIN?
Test if the command is supported
+CGQMIN=?
+CGQMIN: <cid>,
<precedence>, <delay>,
<reliability>, <peak>,
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN:
<cid>, <precedence>,
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,
<mean>[]]
OK
ERROR
+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s)
, (list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported
<mean>s)[<CR><LF>+CGQMI N: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s)
, (list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported
<mean>s)[]]
OK
ERROR Allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by the MS against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message. The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the
(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQMIN command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become undefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated profile.
<cid>
Description Integer type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition 158 LZT 123 7263 R1A 6. DATA - GPRS
<precedence>
Description 0 1 2 3 Subscribed (from network) value used High priority Normal priority Low priority
<delay>
Description 0 1-4 Subscribed (from network) value used Delay class
<reliability>
Description 0 1-5 Subscribed (from network) value used Reliability class
<peak>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Subscribed (from network) value used Up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s) Up to 2 000 (16 kbits/s) Up to 4 000 (32 kbits/s) Up to 8 000 (64 kbits/s) Up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s) Up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s) Up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s) Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s) Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s)
<mean>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Subscribed (from network) value used Best effort 100 (~0.22 bits/s) 200 (~0.44 bits/s) 500 (~1.11 bits/s) 1 000 (~2.2 bits/s) 2 000 (~4.4 bits/s) 5 000 (~11.1 bits/s) LZT 123 7263 R1A 159 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<mean>
Description 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 31 10 000 (~22 bits/s) 20 000 (~44 bits/s) 50 000 (~111 bits/s) 100 000 (~0.22 kbits/s) 200 000 (~0.44 kbits/s) 500 000 (~1.11 kbits/s) 1 000 000 (~2.2 kbits/s) 2 000 000 (~4.4 kbits/s) 5 000 000 (~11.1 kbits/s) 10 000 000 (~22 kbits/s) 20 000 000 (~44 kbits/s) 50 000 000 (~111 kbits/s) 6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) Description Command Possible Responses Set quality of service profile
+CGQREQ=[<cid>
[,<precedence>
[,<delay>
[,<reliability>
[,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
Read the command
+CGQREQ?
Test if the command is supported
+CGQREQ=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>,
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:
<cid>, <precedence>, <delay>,
<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[]]
OK
ERROR
+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,
(list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported <mean>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,
(list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported <mean>s)[]]
OK
ERROR Allows the TE to specify a quality of service profile that is used when the MS sends an activate PDP context request message to the network. 160 LZT 123 7263 R1A 6. DATA - GPRS The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the
(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQREQ command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value. A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
<cid>
Description Integer type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition
<precedence>
Description 0 1 2 3 Subscribed (from network) value used High priority Normal priority Low priority
<delay>
Description 0 1-4 Subscribed (from network) value used Delay class
<reliability>
Description 0 1-5 Subscribed (from network) value used Reliability class
<peak>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Subscribed (from network) value used Up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s) Up to 2 000 (16 kbits/s) Up to 4 000 (32 kbits/s) Up to 8 000 (64 kbits/s) Up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s) Up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s) Up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s) Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s) Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s) LZT 123 7263 R1A 161 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<mean>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 31 Subscribed (from network) value used Best effort 100 (~0.22 bits/s) 200 (~0.44 bits/s) 500 (~1.11 bits/s) 1 000 (~2.2 bits/s) 2 000 (~4.4 bits/s) 5 000 (~11.1 bits/s) 10 000 (~22 bits/s) 20 000 (~44 bits/s) 50 000 (~111 bits/s) 100 000 (~0.22 kbits/s) 200 000 (~0.44 kbits/s) 500 000 (~1.11 kbits/s) 1 000 000 (~2.2 kbits/s) 2 000 000 (~4.4 kbits/s) 5 000 000 (~11.1 kbits/s) 10 000 000 (~22 kbits/s) 20 000 000 (~44 kbits/s) 50 000 000 (~111 kbits/s) 162 LZT 123 7263 R1A 6. DATA - GPRS 6.9 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status Description Command Possible Responses Set command AT+CGREG=[<n>]
Read the current settings AT+CGREG?
Test if the command is supported AT+CGREG=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CGREG:
<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<c i>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
ERROR Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>
when <n>=1 and there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network registration status of the MS, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell. Note!
If the GPRS/Packet Domain MS also supports circuit mode services, the
+CGREG command and +CGREG: result code apply to the registration status and location information for those services.
<n>
Description 0 1 2 Disable network registration unsolicited result code Enable network registration unsolicited result code Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code
<stat>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to register with Registered, home network Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to register with Registration denied Unknown Registered, roaming
<lac>
Description String type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format LZT 123 7263 R1A 163 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<ci>
Description String type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format 6.10 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages Description Command Possible Responses Set service or service preference
+CGSMS=[<service>]
OK
ERROR Read the command
+CGSMS?
Test if the command is supported
+CGSMS=?
+CGSMS: <service>
OK
ERROR
+CGSMS: (list of available
<service>s)
OK
ERROR Used to specify the service or service preference that the MS will use to send MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference.
<services>
Description 0 1 2 3 GPRS/packet domain Circuit switched GPRS/packet domain preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS/packet domain not available) Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS/packet domain if circuit switched not available) 164 LZT 123 7263 R1A 7. Data - HSCSD 7.1 AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call Parameters Description Show current HSCSD call parameters Command AT+CHSC Test if command is supported AT+CHSC=?
Possible Responses
+CHSC:<rx>,<tx>,<aiur
>,<coding>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Returns information about the current HSCSD call parameters, i.e. the current number of receive and transmit timeslots, air interface user rate and channel coding.
<rx>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 No HSCSD call is active. See also note below The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 1 The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 2 The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 3. Not supported The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 4. Not supported
<tx>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 No HSCSD call is active. See also note below The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 1 The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 2. Not supported The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 3. Not supported The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 4. Not supported LZT 123 7263 R1A 165 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<aiur>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No HSCSD call is active. See also note below. Current air interface user rate is 9.6 kbits/s Current air interface user rate is 14.4 kbits/s Current air interface user rate is 19.2 kbits/s Current air interface user rate is 28.8 kbits/s Current air interface user rate is 38.4 kbits/s. Not supported Current air interface user rate is 43.2 kbits/s. Not supported Current air interface user rate is 57.6 kbits/s. Not supported
<coding>
Description 0 1 4 8 No HSCSD call is active. See also note Current channel coding is 4.8 kbits/s (TCH/F4.8). Not supported Current channel coding is 9.6 kbits/s (TCH/F9.6) Current channel coding is 14.4 kbits/s (TCH/F14.4) 7.2 AT+CHSD HSCSD Device Parameters Description Command Possible Responses Show HSCSD features supported by the ME/
TA AT+CHSD
+CHSD:
<mclass>,<maxRx>,
<maxTx>,<sum>,<codings>
Test if command is supported AT+CHSD=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Shows information about HSCSD features supported by the ME/TA.
<mclass>
Description 2 Multislot class is 2
<maxRx>
Description 2 Maximum number of receive timeslots that ME can use is 2
<maxTx>
Description 1 Maximum number of transmit timeslots that ME can use is 1 166 LZT 123 7263 R1A 7. DATA - HSCSD
<sum>
Description 3 Total number of receive and transmit timeslots that ME can use at the same time is 3 (i.e. 2+1). The following applies in a HSCSD call: 2 (receive slots) + (transmit slots)
<sum>
<codings>
Description 1 4 5 8 12 Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 4.8 kbits/s only. Not supported Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6 kbits/s only Indicates that the accepted channel codings for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call are both 4.8 kbits/
s and 9.6 kbits/s. Not supported Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 14.4 kbits/s only Indicates that the accepted channel codings for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call are both 9.6 kbits/
s and 14.4 kbits/s 7.3 AT+CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration Description Command Possible Responses AT+CHSN=[<wAiur>[,<
wRx>[,<topRx>[,<codin gs>]]]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Set HSCSD configuration. This command is also used during a call if new
<wAiur> and/or <wRx>
are/is desired Show current non-
transparent HSCSD setting AT+CHSN?
Test if command is supported and show parameter ranges AT+CHSN=?
+CHSN: <wAiur>,
<wRx>, <topRx>,
<codings>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CHSN: (list of supported
<wAiur>s), (list of supported <wRx>s),
(list of supported
<topRx>s), (list of supported
<codings>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Controls parameters for non-transparent HSCSD calls. Changing
<topRx> or <codings> during a call does not affect the current call. Changing <wAiur> or <wRx> affects the current call only if <topRx>
was non-zero when the call was established. When using the command LZT 123 7263 R1A 167 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL in this way it comes in the action command category. This is what is referred to as user initiated up- and down-grading in GSM 02.34 [4]
and GSM 03.34 [7]. Note!
Recommended value for parameter <speed> in AT+CBST [11] is 0.
<wAiur>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive timeslots from currently selected fixed network user rate
(<speed> parameter from +CBST command, ref [11]) and
<codings>, and <wRx> (or <maxRx> from +CHSD command if <wRx>=0) See note below. Wanted air interface user rate is 9.6 kbit/s Wanted air interface user rate is 14.4 kbit/s Wanted air interface user rate is 19.2 kbit/s Wanted air interface user rate is 28.8 kbit/s Wanted air interface user rate is 38.4 kbit/s. Not supported Wanted air interface user rate is 43.2 kbit/s. Not supported Wanted air interface user rate is 57.6 kbit/s. Not supported
<wRx>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive timeslots from currently selected <wAiur> and <codings>
See note below Wanted number of receive timeslots is 1 Wanted number of receive timeslots is 2 Wanted number of receive timeslots is 3. Not supported Wanted number of receive timeslots is 4. Not supported
<topRx>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 Indicates that the user is not going to change <wAiur>
and /or <wRx> during the next call Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 1 Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 2 Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 3. Not supported Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 4. Not supported 168 LZT 123 7263 R1A 7. DATA - HSCSD
<codings>
Description 1 4 5 8 12 Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 4.8 kbit/s only. Not supported Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6 kbit/s only Indicates that the accepted channel codings for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call are both 4.8 kbit/s and 9.6 kbit/s. Not supported Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 14.4 kbit/s only Indicates that the accepted channel codings for the next established non-transparent HSCSD call are both 9.6 kbit/s and 14.4 kbit/s 7.4 AT+CHSR HSCSD Parameters Report Description Command Possible Responses Set HSCSD parameters reporting on or off AT+CHSR=[<mode>]
Show current setting AT+CHSR?
Test if command is supported and show parameter range AT+CHSR=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CHSR: <mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CHSR: (list of supported
<modes>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Sets the HSCSD parameter reporting on or off. If enabled, the intermediate result code +CHSR is activated.
<mode>
Description 0 1 Disable reporting Enable reporting LZT 123 7263 R1A 169 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 7.5 AT+CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading Description Command Possible Responses Set HSCSD automatic user initiated upgrading on or off AT+CHSU=[<mode>]
OK
ERROR Show current setting AT+CHSU?
Test if command is supported and show parameter range AT+CHSU=?
+CHSU=<mode>
OK
ERROR
+CHSU: (list of supported
<modes>s)
OK
ERROR Enables or disables the HSCSD automatic user-initiated upgrade.
<mode>
Description 0 1 Disable use of UP bit for upgrading Enable use of UP bit for upgrading 170 LZT 123 7263 R1A 8. Data - WAP 8.1 AT*EWBA Ericsson WAP Bookmark Add Description Command Possible Responses Add or delete a bookmark in the list of bookmarks List content of bookmark list AT*EWBA=<bmix>
[,<URL>[,<title>]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR AT*EWBA?
*EWBA:
<bmix1>,<URL1>,<title1>[<CR><L F>*EWBA:
<bmix2>,<URL2>,<title2>[]]
Show if the command is supported. AT*EWBA=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWBA: (list of supported
<bmix>s),<nURL>,<ntitle>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command adds or deletes a bookmark in the list of bookmarks. To add a bookmark the <bmix> parameter should be set to 0. The bookmark is always added to the last position of the bookmark list. If the <title> parameter is omitted the bookmark title is set to the first
<ntitle> number of characters of the <URL>. If the <URL> parameter exceeds <nURL> number of characters, the bookmark URL is truncated to the last / character among the last
<nURL> number of characters. To delete a bookmark from the list, the <bmix> parameter should be set to a value greater than 0. The <URL> and the <title> parameters must be omitted.
<bmix>
Description 0 1 2..25 Add the bookmark to the last position in the list of bookmarks. This value is only valid for adding bookmarks Reserved. The index 1 is reserved for the bookmark to Ericsson Mobile Internet and should not be altered or deleted Index to list of bookmarks. These values are only valid for deleting bookmarks LZT 123 7263 R1A 171 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<URL>
Description String type The URL representing the bookmark
<nURL>
Integer number Description Maximum length of the <URL>-parameter
<title>
Description String type The title representing the bookmark. If omitted the bookmark title is set equal to the first <ntitle> number of characters of the <URL>
<ntitle>
Integer number Description Maximum length of the <title>-parameter 8.2 AT*EWBR Ericsson WAP Bookmark Read Description Command Possible Responses Read bookmark in list of bookmarks AT*EWBR=<bmix>
Show if the command is supported AT*EWBR=?
*EWBR: <URL>,<title>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWBR: (list of supported <bmix>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command reads a bookmark in the bookmark list.
<bmix>
Description Integer type Index to the bookmark in the bookmark list
<URL>
Description String type The URL representing the bookmark
<title>
Description String type The title representing the bookmark. If omitted the bookmark title is set equal to the URL 172 LZT 123 7263 R1A 8. DATA - WAP 8.3 AT*EWCG Ericsson WAP CSD Gateway Description Command Possible Responses Set primary and secondary WAP gateway Read primary and secondary WAP gateway AT*EWCG=<primsec>,
<gateway>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR AT*EWCG?
Show if the command is supported AT*EWCG=?
*EWCG:
<primsec1>,<gateway1>[<
CR><LF>*EWCG:
<primsec2>,<gateway2>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWCG: (list of supported
<primsec>s),<ngateway>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Sets the primary and secondary gateways for the WAP browser used when CSD is the preferred bearer. The gateways are either an IP address or a URL on the network where the gateway can be reached.
<primsec>
Description 1 2 Set primary gateway Set secondary gateway. Not supported
<gateway>
Description String type Gateway address
<ngateway>
Description Integer type Maximum length of gateway address LZT 123 7263 R1A 173 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 8.4 AT*EWCT Ericsson WAP Connection Timeout Description Command Possible Responses Set timeout for WAP download AT*EWCT=<sec>
Read current setting AT*EWCT?
Show if the command is supported AT*EWCT=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWCT: <sec>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWCT: (list of supported <sec>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Sets the timeout period used when connecting to a WAP supplier, i.e. the time the WAP browser will wait for a CSD call to be established.
<sec>
Description Integer type Number of seconds 8.5 AT*EWDT Ericsson WAP Download Timeout Description Command Possible Responses Set timeout for WAP download AT*EWDT=<sec>
Read current setting AT*EWDT?
Show if the command is supported AT*EWDT=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWDT: <sec>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWDT: (list of supported <sec>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command sets the server response timeout period used when downloading a WAP page.
<sec>
Description Integer type Number of seconds 174 LZT 123 7263 R1A 8. DATA - WAP 8.6 AT*EWHP Ericsson WAP Homepage Description Command Possible Responses Set URL to WAP homepage AT*EWHP=<URL>
Read URL to WAP homepage AT*EWHP?
Show if the command is supported AT*EWHP=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWHP: <URL>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWHP: <nURL>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command sets the homepage (i.e. the start page) for the WAP browser.
<URL>
Description String type The URL representing the homepage
<nURL>
Integer number Description Maximum length of the <URL>-parameter 8.7 AT*EWIL Ericsson WAP Image Load Description Command Possible Responses Enable and disable image download in WAP browser AT*EWIL=<onoff>
Read setting for image download in WAP browser AT*EWIL?
Show if the command is supported AT*EWIL=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWIL: <onoff>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWIL: (list of supported <onoff>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Enables and disables image download in the WAP browser.
<onoff>
Description 0 1 Disable image download Enable image download LZT 123 7263 R1A 175 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 8.8 AT*EWLI Ericsson WAP Login Description Command Possible Responses Setup user identity and password for WAP proxy AT*EWLI=<user>,
<password>
Read user identity AT*EWLI?
Show if the command is supported AT*EWLI=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWLI: <user>
OK
ERROR
*EWLI:
<nuser>,<npassword>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command sets up user identity and password to be used for logging in to a WAP proxy; i.e. connecting to a WAP service provider.
<user>
Description String type User name for the WAP connection
<password>
Description String type Password for the WAP connection
<nuser>
Integer number Description Maximum length for username
<npassword>
Description Integer number Maximum length for password 176 LZT 123 7263 R1A 8. DATA - WAP 8.9 AT*EWPA Ericsson WAP Push Access Setting Description Command Possible Responses Sets the push access AT*EWPA=<onoff>
OK
+CME ERROR <err>
Reads the current settings AT*EWPA?
*EWPA: <onoff>
Tests if the command is supported AT*EWPA=?
*EWPA: (list of supported <onoff>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
The command is used to decide if message push is allowed.
<onoff>
Description 0 1 2 Always ask Message push disabled Message push enabled 8.10 AT*EWPB Ericsson WAP Preferred Bearer Description Command Possible Responses Set preferred WAP carrier AT*EWPB=<pbearer>
[,<IA_index>]
Read preferred WAP carrier AT*EWPB?
Show if the command is supported AT*EWPB=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWPB: <pbearer>
[,<IA_index>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWPB: (list of supported
<pbearer>s),(list of supported
<IA_index>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command sets the preferred bearer for WAP. If Internet account is chosen as the preferred bearer, the index of the Internet account to be used shall be sent as the second parameter: <IA_index>. If SMS is chosen as the preferred bearer a second parameter is ignored.
<pbearer>
Description 1 2 3 SMS Not supported Internet account LZT 123 7263 R1A 177 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<IA_index>
Description 0 Always ask 165000 Index of Internet account to be used by the WAP browser 8.11 AT*EWPN Ericsson WAP Profile Name Description Command Possible Responses Set WAP profile name AT*EWPN=<profile>,
<name>
List WAP profile names AT*EWPN?
Show if the command is supported AT*EWPN=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWPN: <profile1>,<name1>,
<lock_state>[<CR><LF>
*EWPN: <profile2>,<name2>,
<lock_state>[...]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWPN: (list of supported
<profile>s), <nlength>,(list of supported <lock_state>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Sets the name of the profile defined by <profile>.
<profile>
Description 1 2 n WAP settings profile number 1 WAP settings profile number 2
. WAP settings profile number n
<name>
Description String value WAP profile name. Max length defined by <nlength>
<nlength>
Description Integer value Max length of WAP profile name
<lock_state>
Description 0 1 The profile is not locked The profile is locked 178 LZT 123 7263 R1A 8. DATA - WAP 8.12 AT*EWPR Ericsson WAP Profile Description Command Possible Responses Set active WAP profile AT*EWPR=<profile>
Query active WAP profile AT*EWPR?
Show if the command is supported AT*EWPR=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWPR: <profile>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EWPR: (list of supported
<profile>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Selects active WAP settings profile.
<profile>
Description 1 2 n WAP settings profile number 1 WAP settings profile number 2
. WAP settings profile number n LZT 123 7263 R1A 179 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 180 LZT 123 7263 R1A 9. GPS Interoperability 9.1 AT*EENMEA NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2 Description Command Possible Responses Enable NMEA commands on the UART Show the current setting AT*EENMEA=<mode>
AT*EENMEA?
Shows if the command is supported AT*EENMEA=?
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: < err>
*EENMEA:<mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
*EENMEA: (list of supported
<mode>s)
+CME ERROR: < err>
This command enables transmission of NMEA commands from UART1 to UART2 and vice versa. The module acts as a transparent link between the GPS device connected to UART2 and the application communicating with it on UART1. When the application sends the command AT*EENMEA=2 the module is able to handle both AT and NMEA commands simultaneously. If the OK response is received the application can start handling both NMEA and AT commands. Otherwise the response ERROR is returned. In the mode with simultaneous AT and NMEA commands, <CR> is required after each NMEA command and after the last AT command before the new NMEA. NMEA commands must start with a $. All NMEA commands are forwarded to UART2. All NMEA responses from UART2 are displayed as responses to UART1 along with AT responses. By sending AT*EENMEA=0, the application ends AT and NMEA commands, simultaneous handling mode. It sends OK, and then returns to AT mode. The port rate of UART1 for NMEA commands can be controlled using the AT*NMPR command. Responses Description OK ERROR The requested action has been performed Following causes of error are considered:
- incorrect syntax
- NMEA commands have already been enabled in other 07.10 channels LZT 123 7263 R1A 181 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<mode>
Description 0 1 2 Disable NMEA communication. Default Enable NMEA communication in NMEA only mode. Not supported Enable NMEA communication simultaneously with AT commands 9.2 AT*E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate Description Command Possible Responses Request operation to set data rate for GPS/
NMEA Port AT*E2NMPR=<pr>
ERROR
OK Displays current setting AT*E2NMPR?
*E2NMPR: <pr>
Show if the command is supported AT*E2NMPR=?
*E2NMPR: (list of supported <pr>s)
ERROR This command allows the user to set the physical Data rate for the GPS/
NMEA port. The port rate will be set for the GPS/NMEA port only when NMEA is active - see AT*EENMEA.
<op>
Description o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 600 Baud rate 1200 Baud rate 2400 Baud rate 4800 Baud rate 9600 Baud rate. Default setting 19200 Baud rate 38400 Baud rate 57600 Baud rate 115200 Baud rate 230400 Baud rate 460800 Baud rate Examples AT*E2NMPR=?
*E2NMPR=(0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10) OK Port rate currently set:
182 LZT 123 7263 R1A 9. GPS INTEROPERABILITY AT*E2NMPR?
*E2NMPR: 4 OK Set GPS/NMEA port rate to 4800 baud:
AT*E2NMPR=2 OK LZT 123 7263 R1A 183 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 184 LZT 123 7263 R1A 10. Internet 10.1 AT*ENAD Ericsson Internet Account Define Description Command Possible Responses Define an Internet account AT*ENAD=[<index>][,<name
>,<userid>,<password>,
<bearer>,(bearer_settings)]
*ENAD:<index>[,<cid>]
+CME ERROR <err>
If <bearer>=0
(bearer_settings):=<dialup_n r>,<dial_type>, <data_rate>
If <bearer>=1
(bearer_settings):=
<pref_serv>,<pap_chap>
If <bearer>=2
(bearer_settings):=
<bt_device_address>
Read the current settings AT*ENAD?
AT*ENAD=?
Test if the command is supported
*ENAD:list of <index>s with corresponding
<name>, <userid>, <bearer> followed by the list of bearer dependent parameters If <bearer>=0
(bearer_settings):=<dialup_nr>,
<dial_type>,<data_rate>, <lock_state>
If <bearer>=1
(bearer_settings):=<pref_serv>,
<pap_chap>,<cid>,<lock_state>
If <bearer>=2
(bearer_settings):=<bt_device_address>,
<lock_state>
+CME ERROR <err>
*ENAD:list of supported <index>s,max length of <name>,max length of
<userid>,max length of <password>,
(0),max length of ,list of supported
<dial_type>s,list of supported
<data_rate>s,list of supported
<lock_state>s
*ENAD:list of supported <index>s,max length of <name>,max length of
<userid>,max length of <password>, (1),list of supported <pref_serv>s,list of supported
<pap_chap>s,list of supported
<lock_state>s
*ENAD:list of supported <index>s,max length of <name>,max length of
<userid>,max length of <password>,
(2),max length of <bt_device_address>, list of supported <lock_state>s
+CME ERROR <err>
LZT 123 7263 R1A 185 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL This command is used for defining an Internet account.
<index>
integer 1-65000 Description Each Internet account is given a unique index
<name>
Description Each Internet account has a username string
(maximum of 20, 16-bit characters)
<userid>
Description string (max 30 8-bit characters) The user ID to be used when setting up the connection
<passwd>
Description The passwd to be used when setting up the connection string
(maximum of 30, 8-bit characters)
<bearer>
Description 0 1 2 3 Circuit switched dial-up Packet domain service Bluetooth. Not supported SMS. Not supported
<dialup_nr>
Description string (max 30 8-bit characters) The phone number to be used when setting up the connection
<dial_type>
Description 0 1 GSM data (CSD) Digital (ISDN) 186 LZT 123 7263 R1A 10. INTERNET
<data_rate>
Description 1 2 3 4
<cid>
integer 9600 14400 19200 28800 Description ID number of a PDP context as defined in AT+CGDCONT
(S15)
<pref_serv>
Description 0 1 Automatic Packet domain service only
<pap_chap>
Description 0 1 2 Normal: only PAP allowed Secure: only CHAP allowed None: no authentication scheme is used
<bt_device_address>
Description 48 bit IEEE address, six groups of two hexadecimal numbers separated by :. E.g. 1A:3C:CD:33:1F:G8 This parameter is used to set the Bluetooth device address for the Bluetooth connection being set up
<lock_state>
Description 0 1 The account is not locked The account is locked LZT 123 7263 R1A 187 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 188 LZT 123 7263 R1A 11. Identification 11.1 AT Attention Command Description Command Possible Responses Checks the communication between the MS and application AT
OK
+CME ERROR <err>
This command is used to determine the presence of an MS. If the MS supports AT commands, it returns an OK final result code. 11.2 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration Description Execute AT&F Command Possible Responses Execute AT&F=<profile>
OK
ERROR
OK
ERROR Show if supported and list available parameter range AT&F=?
&F: (list of supported
<profile>s) This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to default values specified by the manufacturer, which may take in consideration hardware configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria.
<profile >
Description 0 Select the factory profile to restore LZT 123 7263 R1A 189 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 11.3 AT&W Store User Profile Description Command Possible Responses Stores the current user profile to non volatile memory AT&W=[<pr>] or AT&W[<pr>]
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT&W=?
&W: (list of supported
<pr>s) This command stores the current user profile in non-volatile memory.
< pr>
Description 0 Stores current settings in User Profile 0 11.4 AT*
List all Supported AT Commands Description Command Possible Responses List all implemented AT commands AT*
<AT Command1>
[<CR> <LF>
<AT Command2>[]]
<AT Command1>
[<CR> <LF>
<AT Command2>[]]
Lists all the commands supported by the MS. 11.5 AT*ESIR Read MS System Interface Release Description Command Possible Responses Read MS system interface release AT*ESIR
*ESIR:<x>.<y>
Show if the command is supported AT*ESIR=?
OK
ERROR Causes the MS to return the interface release.
<x>
Description Integer type Major version (one digit)
<y>
Description Integer type Minor version (one digit) 190 LZT 123 7263 R1A 11. IDENTIFICATION 11.6 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification Description Request manufacturer identification Command AT+CGMI Show if the command is supported AT+CGMI=?
Possible Responses
<manufacturer>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text.]
<manufacturer>
Description SONY ERICSSON This companys name in upper case letters 11.7 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification Description Request the model identification Command AT+CGMM Possible Responses
<model type><model name>
+CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command is supported AT+CGMM=?
OK
ERROR Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <model>, determined by the MS manufacturer. It is intended to permit the user of the ITAE/ETAE to identify the specific model of the MS to which it is connected. Typically the text will consist of a single line containing the name of the product, but manufacturers may choose to provide more information if desired.
<model type>
Description String type A unique ASCII character/digit string, always 10 characters long. Spaces are used when the number of characters/digits is less than 10
<model name>
Description String type Model name for the transceiver unit, for example, GM47 LZT 123 7263 R1A 191 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 11.8 AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification Description Request MS revision identification string Command AT+CGMR Possible Responses
<revision>
+CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command is supported AT+CGMR=?
OK
ERROR This command causes the MS to return a string containing information about the software version.
<revision>
Description String type An ASCII string containing date (year, month, day, hour, minute) plus KRC number. Example: 9710051610 CXC125112 11.9 AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification Description Request product serial number Command AT+CGSN Possible Responses
+CGSN: <sn>
+CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command is supported AT+CGSN=?
OK
ERROR This command causes the MS to return the IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity), which identifies the individual ME.
<sn>
String Description The IMEISV, which is the IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity; refer GSM 03.03 [4]) number of the ME and the software version number. Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>
192 LZT 123 7263 R1A 11. IDENTIFICATION 11.10 AT+GMI Read Manufacturer Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request manufacturer identification AT+GMI Test if command is supported AT+GMI=?
<manufacturer>
OK
ERROR This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text. Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the name of the manufacturer, but may provide more information such as address and telephone number for customer service.
<manufacture>
Description string type The total number of characters, including line terminators, in the information text returned in response to this command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence 0 or OK, so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of this information text 11.11 AT+GMM Read Model Identification Description Request revision identification Test if command is supported Command AT+GMM AT+GMM=?
Possible Responses
<model>
OK
ERROR This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of information text, determined by the manufacturer, which is intended to permit the user of the DCE to identify the specific model of device. Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the name of the product, but manufacturers may choose to provide any information desired.
<model>
Description string type The total number of characters, including line terminators, in the information text returned in response to this command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence 0 or OK, so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of this information text LZT 123 7263 R1A 193 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 11.12 AT+GMR Read Revision Identification Description Request revision identification Test if command is supported Command AT+GMR AT+GMR=?
Possible Responses
<revision>
OK
ERROR This command returns a manufacturer specified software revision name in a text string.
<revision>
Description string type The total number of characters, including line terminators, in the information text returned in response to this command shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note that the information text shall not contain the sequence "0" or
"OK", so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end of this information text 11.13 ATI Identification Information Description Execute Command Possible Responses ATI[<value>]
<information>
This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text, followed by a final result code. As an option, <value> can be used to select from among multiple types of identifying information as shown in the table below. This command provides compatibility with Microsoft Windows 95.
<value >
Description 0 1 3 5 7 8 9 10 Same information as +GMM command (model identification) Same information as +GMR command (revision identification) Modem model description Active settings Modem configuration profile (brief listing of the modem functionality: fax classes, Bluetooth, IrDA, modem type, etc.) DCE hardware type version PnP (plug and play) information Same information as +GMI command (manufacturer identification). Not supported 194 LZT 123 7263 R1A 12. Input/Output 12.1 AT*E2IO Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write Description Command Possible Responses Request operation of the I/O signals AT*E2IO=<op>,<io>
[,<val>][,<adc_val>]
Show if the command is supported AT*E2IO=?
ERROR
OK
*E2IO:
<op>,<io>[,<val>]
[,<adc_val>]
OK
*E2IO: (list of supported <op>s),
<io>s,(list of supported <val>s),
(list of supported
<adc_val>s)
ERROR Controls the operation of the general purpose I/O signals. It is possible to perform up to 5 operations. The operations are as follows:
Read the state of the input/output signals. Digital state or digital value of an ADC input or the DAC output. In case of a digital I/O, the command has the following aspect:
AT*E2IO=0,I1
*E2IO: 0,I1,0 OK If the requested read is focused on analogue information, the digital read is as follows:
AT*E2IO=0,AD1
*E2IO: 0,AD1,,62 OK
Write: fixes an output with a specific value. Two possible values for digital sources or 256 values for the analogue ones. The response is OK or ERROR if giving an output to the signal is not possible.
Configure: configuration is applicable to those signals that are bi-
directional. Configuration changes the signal direction. The response is OK, or ERROR if the signal is not bi-directional.
Configure check: checks the state of the I/Os.
Trigger: the MS can be programmed to send an unsolicited result code whenever a change in one of the inputs has been produced. The trigger has to be configured for each input. LZT 123 7263 R1A 195 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
Trigger check: checks the state of the inputs..
<op>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5
<io>
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 DA1 AD1 AD2 AD3 Read Write Configure Configure check Trigger Trigger check Description Digital Input 1. Supported Operations: 0,2,3,4,5 Digital Input 2. Supported Operations: 0,2,3,4,5 Digital Input 3. Supported Operations: 0,2,3,4,5 Digital Input 4. Supported Operations: 0,2,3,4,5 Digital Input 5. Supported Operations: 0,4,5 Digital Output 1. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3 Digital Output 2. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3 Digital Output 3. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3 Digital Output 4. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3 Digital Output 5. Supported Operations: 0,1 Digital Output 6. Supported Operations: 0,1 Digital Output 7. Supported Operations: 0,1 Digital/Analogue Input: Supported Operations: 0,1 Analogue/Digital Output 1: Supported Operations: 0 Analogue/Digital Output 2: Supported Operations: 0 Analogue/Digital Output 3: Supported Operations: 0
<val>
Description 0 1 The digital I/O is not active. The logic value is FALSE The digital I/O is active. Logic value is TRUE
<adc_val>
Description 0-255 The decimal value shall represent the analogue voltage it is hold on the I/O. Applicable only to A/D or D/A signals 196 LZT 123 7263 R1A 13. Interface 13.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control See 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control 13.2 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control Description Command Possible Responses Set behavior of carrier detect AT&C[<value>]
OK ERROR Determines the behaviour of the carrier detect.
<value>
Description 0 1 DCD always on DCD follows the connection. Default value 13.3 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response Description Command Possible Responses Control actions from DTE AT&D[<value>]
OK ERROR Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DTE.
<value>
Description 0 1 2 Ignore. Default value When in on-line data mode, switch to on-line command mode. For all other states, see <value>=2 Disconnect and switch to off-line command mode LZT 123 7263 R1A 197 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 13.4 AT+WS46 Mode Selection Description Command Possible Responses Sets the cellular protocol mode AT+WS46=n Queries the current cellular protocol mode AT+WS46?
OK
ERROR
<n> OK
ERROR Queries the possible cellular protocol modes AT+WS46=?
(list of supported <n>s) OK
ERROR Allows an accessory to query and control the cellular protocol mode of the phone.
<n> parameter Description 12 This value is used for GSM at 900 Mhz., DCS-1800, and PCS-1900 phones 13.5 ATE Command Echo Description Command Possible Responses Request Command Echo ATE[<value>]
Show the current setting Show if the command is supported ATE?
ATE=?
OK
ERROR
<value>
E: (list of supported
<value>s) The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes characters received from the DTE during command state and online command state.
<value>
Description 0 1 DCE does not echo characters during command state and online command state DCE echoes characters during command state and online command state. Default value 198 LZT 123 7263 R1A 13. INTERFACE 13.6 ATV DCE Response Format Description Set DCE response format Read the current setting Show if the command is supported Command ATV[=]<value>
ATV?
ATV=?
Possible Responses
OK
ERROR V: <value>
V: (list of supported
<value>s) Select either descriptive or numeric response codes.
<value>
Description 0 1 Display numeric result codes Display verbose result codes. Default value List of result codes ATV0 Description ATV1 OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR NO DIALTONE BUSY NO ANSWER 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 CONNECT
<TEXT>
Manufacturer
-specific Acknowledges execution of a command A connection has been established;
the DCE is moving from command state to online data state The DCE has detected an incoming call signal from the network The connection has been terminated or the attempt to establish a connection failed Command not recognized, command line maximum length exceeded, parameter value invalid, or other problem with processing the command line No dial tone detected Engaged (busy) signal detected
@ (Wait for Quiet Answer) dial modifier was used, but remote ringing followed by five seconds of silence was not detected before expiration of the connection timer Same as CONNECT, but includes manufacturer-specific text that may specify DTE speed, line speed, error control, data compression, or other status LZT 123 7263 R1A 199 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 13.7 ATZ Reset to Default Configuration Description Execute ATZ Command Possible Responses Execute ATZ=<profile>
Show if supported and list available parameter range ATZ=?
OK
ERROR
OK
ERROR Z: (list of supported
<profile>s) This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to their default values as specified by the user. Consider hardware configuration switches or non-volatile parameter storage (if implemented) when using this command. Commands included on the same command line as the Z command will be ignored.
<profile >
Description 0 Select the user profile to restore 200 LZT 123 7263 R1A 13. INTERFACE 13.8 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol Description Command Possible Responses Switch to 07.10 Returns current setting for multiplexer Show list of supported services AT+CMUX=<transp arency>[,<subset>
[,<port_speed>[,
<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>
[,<T2>[,<T3>[,<k>
AT+CMUX?
AT+CMUX=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CMUX:<transparency>,<subset
>,<port_speed>,<N1>,<T1>,<N2
>,<T2>,<T3>[,<k>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CMUX: (list of supported
<transparency>s),
(list of supported <subset>s),
(list of supported
<port_speed>s),
(list of supported <N1>s),
(list of supported <T1>s),
(list of supported <N2>s),
(list of supported <T2>s),
(list of supported <T3>s),
(list of supported <k>)
+CME ERROR: <err>
The command is used to turn on the multiplexer. Only no transparency is supported. The parameter <k> is not used.
<transparency>
Description 0 1 No transparency HDLC Transparency. Not supported
<subset>
Description 0 1 2 Only UIH frames used UI frames may be used. Not supported I frames may be used (error recovery is activated). Not supported
<port_speed>
Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 9600 bit/s 19200 bit/s 38400 bit/s 57600 bit/s 115200 bit/s 230400 bit/s. Not supported LZT 123 7263 R1A 201 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<N1>
1..128 31
<T1>
1..255 10
<N2>
1..100 3
<T2>
2..255 30
<T3>
1..255 10
<k>
0 1..7 Description Maximum frame size. Only <N1>=31 supported Default maximum frame size Description Acknowledgement timer (tens of milliseconds). Only
<T1>=10 supported 100ms default timer Description Maximum number of re-transmissions. Only <N2>=3 supported Default maximum number of re-transmissions Description Control channel response timer (tenths of milliseconds). Only <T2>=30 supported 300ms default timer Description Wake up response timer (seconds). Only <T3>=10 supported 10s default timer Description Window size Window size. Not supported 202 LZT 123 7263 R1A 13. INTERFACE 13.9 AT+CRES Restore Settings Description Command Possible Responses Restore settings AT+CRES[=<profile>]
Get available profiles AT+CRES=?
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CRES: (list of supported
<profile>s)
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Restores message service settings from non-volatile memory to active memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settings specified in commands Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB
(if implemented) are restored. Certain settings, such as SIM SMS parameters, cannot be restored.
< profile >
Description 0..2 Profile number where settings are to be stored. Default is zero LZT 123 7263 R1A 203 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 13.10 AT+ICF Cable Interface Character Format Description Command Possible Responses Defines DTE-DCE character framing AT+ICF=[format[,parity]]
OK
ERROR Read the current setting AT+ICF?
Show if the command is supported AT+ICF=?
+ICF:
<format>,<parity>
OK
ERROR
+ICF: (list of supported
<format>s), (list of supported <parity>s)
OK
ERROR This extended-format compound parameter is used to determine the local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing used by the DCE to accept DTE commands, and while transmitting information text and result code, if this is not automatically determined; (Not supported) +IPR=0 forces +ICF=0 (see +IPR).
<format>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 auto detect. Not supported 8 Data 2 Stop. Not supported 8 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop. Not supported 8 Data 1 Stop. Default value 7 Data 2 Stop. Not supported 7 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop. Not supported 7 Data 1 Stop. Not supported
<parity>
Description 0 1 2 3 Odd. Not supported Even. Not supported Mark. Not supported Space. Default value 204 LZT 123 7263 R1A 13. INTERFACE 13.11 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control Description Command Possible Responses Defines DTE-DCE local flow control AT+IFC=[<by_te>,[<by_ ta>]]
OK
ERROR Read the current setting AT+IFC?
+IFC: <by_te>,<by_ta>
Show if the command is supported AT+IFC=?
+IFC: (list of supported
<by_te>s,<by_ta>s) Defines the flow control between the modem and the computer when in on-line data mode. No flow control is enabled in any of the command modes.
<by_te>
Description 0 1 2 3 No flow control on DTE Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are removed by the DCE interface RTS flow control on DCE. Default value Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are passed to the remote DCE/DTE
<by_ta>
Description 0 1 2 No flow control on DCE Xon/Xoff flow control on DTE CTS flow control on DCE. Default value 13.12 AT+ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting Description Command Possible Responses Defines DTE-DCE character framing Read the current setting AT+ILRR=<value>
OK
ERROR AT+ILRR?
+ILRR:<value>
Show if the command is supported AT+ILRR=?
+ILRR:(list of supported
<values>s) Specifies whether or not the extended-format +ILRR:<rate>
information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The <rate>
reported shall represent the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-
DCE rate. If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted after any modulation, error control or data compression reports are LZT 123 7263 R1A 205 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL transmitted, and before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) is transmitted. The <rate> is applied after the final result code is transmitted.
<value>
Description 0 1 Disables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is not transmitted). Default value Enables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is transmitted) 13.13 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port Command Description Command Possible Responses Defines fixed DTE rate AT+IPR=[rate]
Read the current setting AT+IPR?
Show if the command is supported AT+IPR=?
OK
ERROR
+IPR:<rate>
OK
ERROR
+IPR: (), (list of fixed-
only <rate>s)]
OK
ERROR Specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands, in addition to 1200 bit/s or 9600 bit/s (as required in v25ter [1], subclause 4.3). It may be used to select operation at rates used by the DTE, which the DCE is not capable of automatically detecting.
(Not supported) Specifying a value of 0 disables the function and allows operation only at rates automatically detectable by the DCE. The specified rate takes effect following the issuance of any result code(s) associated with the current command line.
<rate>
Description Discrete integer value The <rate> value specified shall be the rate in bits per second at which the DTE-DCE interface should operate, e.g. 19200 or 115200. The rates supported by a particular DCE are manufacturer specific. The following rates, are supported (with two exceptions);
1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 (Not supported) 19200 28800 (Not supported) 38400 57600 76800 115200 230400 460800 206 LZT 123 7263 R1A 13. INTERFACE 13.14 AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time Description Syntax Possible responses Set GPRS online command guard time AT*E2ESC=[<gt>]
OK
ERROR Read the current setting AT*E2ESC?
*E2ESC: <gt>
Show if the command is supported AT*E2ESC=?
OK
ERROR Defines a guard time for the escape sequence in GPRS to return to on-
line command mode i.e. if +++AT<CR> is received either as part of the data stream or a terminating string from the application and no further data is received for the duration of the guard time the module will go into on line command mode. This guards against the module accidentally going into on line command mode.
<gt>
0 1-10 Description No guard time. Default value Guard time in seconds LZT 123 7263 R1A 207 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 208 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. Network 14.1 AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description Description Command Possible Responses Request network cell description AT*E2CD=<n>
ERROR
OK Read the command AT*E2CD?
Show if the command is supported AT*E2CD=?
*E2CD:
<n>,<lac>,<ci>,<ta>
ERROR
*E2CD: (list of supported <n>s)
ERROR Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code E2CD: when
<n>=1, or when there is a change in one of the network cell parameters, E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>. Read command returns the status of result code presentation and several values, which show the network cell parameters. Location information <lac>, <ci> and <ta> are returned only when
<n>=1 and the ME is registered in the network. To know if the ME is registered use the AT+CREG command. If the ME is not registered in the cellular network an ERROR message is returned.
<n>
0 1 Description Disable network location information unsolicited result code, (default) Enable network location information unsolicited result code *E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>
<lac>
Description String type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
<ci>
Description string type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format LZT 123 7263 R1A 209 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<ta>
0-63 Description According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing advance value is the binary representation of the timing advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 s. <ta> is the integer representation of the timing advance in binary format 64-255 Reserved 210 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. NETWORK 14.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set the response presentation mode Display mode neighbour cells are taken from the toplist Compact mode. The first cell is the serving cell, the rest are neighbour cells taken from the toplist Verbose mode. The first cell is the serving cell and the rest are neighbour cells as provided by the network in the system info. messages (2 and 5) and via the AT*E2NBTS command Reduced display mode - info. as display mode but without text headings or
<CR><LF>
separators, neighbour cells from top list Read the command Show if the command is supported AT*E2EMM=
<n>[,<m>]
ERROR
OK
*E2EMM:
Serving Cell MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1, C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,T N],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>
[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,
<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>], NeighBours Cells MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1, C2],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
OK
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,
<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>][,<rxlSub>,<rxqsub>,
<ta>],<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>,
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>
OK
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,
<ta>,<tn>],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
OK
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,
<ta>,<tn>],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
OK AT*E2EMM?
*E2EMM: <n>
ERROR AT*E2EMM=
*E2EMM: (list of supported <n>s),(list of supported <m>s)
ERROR LZT 123 7263 R1A 211 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL There are four presentation format modes (Display, Compact, Verbose, and Reduced Display) and two response types (one shot response or continuous unsolicited responses). The purpose of the presentation format mode Display is to display the data in a readable form, including headers and line breaks
(<CR><LF>). This format is, however, not well suited for machine decoding. The formats Verbose, Compact and Reduced Display do not have headers or line breaks. Verbose mode displays more parameters than the compact mode. The response types give the user the choice of one a shot information or an unsolicited response with <m> seconds between each response. Examples AT*E2EMM=1
*E2EMM:<CR><LF>
Serving Cell<CR><LF>
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,Rx QFull,RxQSub,TA,TN]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,
<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>]<CR><LF>
NeighBours Cells<CR><LF>
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,C2]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>
OK AT*E2EMM=3
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>][,<servcell rxlSub>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>],<neighborcell1 mcc>,<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>,<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>,
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcellnci>,
<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,<neighborcelln rxl><CR><LF>
OK AT*E2EMM=5
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,<servcell C1>,<servcell C2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell tn>,<servcell ta>], 212 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. NETWORK
<neighborcell1 mcc>,<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>[,<neighborcell1 C1>,<neighborcell1 C2>],<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 C1>,<neighborcell2 C2>],
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,<neighborcelln rxl> [,<neighborcelln C1>,<neighborcelln C2>]<CR><LF>
OK AT*E2EMM=7
*E2EMM:<servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,<servcell c1>,<servcell c2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>,<servcell tn>],<neighborcell1 mcc>,< neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>[,<
neighborcell1 c1>,<neighborcell1 c2>],<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 c1>,<neighborcell2c2>]
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcelln mnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln c1>,<neighborcelln c2>]
OK The mode setting <n> in the set command has the combination listed in the table below. When <n>=5, the shot information is the same as in <n> = 1, but neighbouring cells, which have to be up to 16. This is the information that comes from the Serving Cell through the BCCH, reporting the BTS that are on the Serving Cell's surroundings.
<n>
Description 0 1 2 3 Disable network monitoring unsolicited result code. Default One shot presentation of the network location information. Display mode with headers and <CR><LF>
line separators Enable network location information unsolicited result code in Display mode (like n=1). There will be continuous unsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart One shot presentation of the compact network location information LZT 123 7263 R1A 213 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<n>
Description 4 5 6 7 8
<m>
1-255 Enable compact network location information unsolicited result code. There will be continuous unsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart One shot presentation of the network location information
(verbose format), including 16 BTSs, coming from the Serving Cell signalling information As n=5 format but there will be continuous unsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart One shot presentation of the network information (same information as in n=1) but no headers or <CR><LF> line separators. Neighbor cells from the Toplist As n=7 format but there will be continuous unsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart Description Integer type giving time (in seconds) between unsolicited responses. Default=5
<mcc>
Description Integer type Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU
<mnc>
Description Integer type Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell
<lac>
Description Integer type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
<ci>
Description Integer type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
<bsic>
Description Integer type One byte Base Stations Identification code in hexadecimal format
<ch>
(0-1023) Description It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF Channel, which identifies the BCCH carrier 214 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. NETWORK
<rxl>
Description Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idle mode
<rxlfull>
Description Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is taken in the Downlink and statistically is applied to 100 TDMA frames of the TCH or during a SACCH multiframe
<rxlsub>
Description Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is taken from the DownLink signal and the average is applied to subset of SACCH frames
<rxqfull>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BER < 0.1%
0.26% < BER < 0.30%
0.51% < BER < 0.64%
1.0% < BER < 1.3%
1.9% < BER < 2.7%
3.8% < BER < 5.4%
7.6% < BER < 11.0%
BER > 15.0%
<mcc>
Description Integer type Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU
<rxqsub> is the parameter that indicates the quality in the received signal on dedicated mode. The measurement average is applied to a subset of a SACCH multiframe.
<rxqsub>
Description 0 1 2 3 BER < 0.1%
0.26% < BER < 0.30%
0.51% < BER < 0.64%
1.0% < BER < 1.3%
LZT 123 7263 R1A 215 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<rxqsub>
Description 4 5 6 7
<c1>
Integer
<c2>
Integer
<ta>
0-63 1.9% < BER < 2.7%
3.8% < BER < 5.4%
7.6% < BER < 11.0%
BER > 15.0%
Description Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells. The MS calculates this parameter, in idle mode, to decide if the cell is suitable to camp on. After the calculation the criterion is C1 > 0. See GSM 05.08 Description Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells. This parameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection Description According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing advance value is the binary representation of the timing advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 s. <ta> is the integer representation of the timing advance in binary format 64-255 Reserved
<tn>
0-7 Description Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic channel 216 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. NETWORK 14.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication Description Request service provider indication Command AT*E2SPN Possible Responses
*E2SPN: <spi>
+CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command is supported AT*E2SPN=?
OK
ERROR Causes the MS to return the service provider name stored in the SIM card (<spi> parameter). The text will consist of a maximum of 16 bytes containing the service provider name stored in the EFSPN file in the SIM card (see GSM 11.11).
<spi>
String Description String type field of maximum length 16 bytes; character set as specified by command Select TE character set
+CSCS 14.4 AT*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status Description Command Possible Responses Requests current status for ALS AT*EALS Test if the command is supported AT*EALS=?
*EALS: <status>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Used to request the MS to give ALS (Alternate Line Services) status. The information is available on the SIM card. If ALS is active, the user has two lines for voice calls. The line number or name tag for the line is then indicated on the display.
<status>
Description 0 1 ALS function is not active (off) ALS function is active (on) LZT 123 7263 R1A 217 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 14.5 AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile Description Command Possible Responses Read the customer service profile from the SIM AT*ECSP=<service group>
Test if the command is supported AT*ECSP=?
*ECSP: <service group>,<services>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command is used to read the customer service profile (CSP) from the SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates the services that are user accessible. Each of the services has a related bit within the CSP. The services are grouped into service groups, with a maximum of 8 services in a group. For each service group, a bit mask tells which services are available (bit=1). Unused bits are set to 0.
<service group>
Byte Description Each service group has a corresponding number, service group code
<services>
Description byte Bit mask (8 bits), indicating the services within the service group Bit=0: unused or unavailable service Bit=1: available service 218 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. NETWORK 14.6 AT*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network Description Command Possible Responses Read entries in SIM preferred list AT*EPNR=<format>
[,<index1>
[,<index2]]
Test if the command is supported and list the possible settings AT*EPNR=?
*EPNR:
<index1>,<oper1>[...]
*EPNR: <index2>,
<oper2>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EPNR: (list of supported <index>s),
(list of supported
<format>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command is used to read the SIM preferred list of networks
(EFPLMNsel).
<index1>
Description integer Start index (>0)
<index2>
Description integer Stop index (>0)
<format>
Description 2 Numeric <oper>
<oper>
string Description String indicates the code for the operator. E.g. GSM - Sweden - Europolitan: 24008 (3 + 2). PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network LZT 123 7263 R1A 219 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 14.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network Description Command Possible Responses Write/delete entries in SIM preferred list AT*EPNW=[<index>]
[,<format>,<oper>]
Test if the command is supported and list the possible settings AT*EPNW=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EPNW: (list of supported
<index>s), (list of supported
<format>)s
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks
(EFPLMNsel). The entry field <oper> contains mobile country code
(MCC) and mobile network code (MNC).
<index>
Integer Description Index to entry in SIM preferred list. The SIM preferred list contains at least 8 positions according to GSM 11.11
<format>
Description 0 1 2
<oper>
String Long format alphanumeric <oper>. Not supported Short format alphanumeric <oper>. Not supported Numeric <oper>
Description String indicates the code for the operator. E.g. GSM Sweden - Europolitan: 24008 (3 + 2). PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network 220 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. NETWORK 14.8 AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number Description Request SIM Serial number Command AT*E2SSN?
Possible Responses
*E2ESSN: <SSN>
Shows if the command is supported AT*E2SSN=?
OK
ERROR This command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field
(address 2FE2) on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE. This field is detailed in GSM 11.11 section 10.1.1.
<SSN>
Description String without double quotes SIM serial number EXAMPLES AT*E2SSN?
8944110063503224707 OK
:- where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is 984411003605234207F7. Test command:
AT*E2SSN=?
OK LZT 123 7263 R1A 221 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 14.9 AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name Description Command Possible Responses Sets the line name tag in the MS AT*ESLN=<line>
[,<name>]
Read the current setting AT*ESLN?
Test if the command is supported and list the possible settings AT*ESLN=?
Sets the name tag for a selected line.
<line>
Description
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESLN:
<line1>,<name1><CR><LF>
*ESLN: <line2>,<name2>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESLN: (list of supported
<line>s),<lname>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR 0 1 2 Default. This means that the two lines will use the default name tags, i.e. "L1" and "L2"
Line 1 Line 2
<name>
Description String Characters for name tag This parameter is optional when <line> is set to 0
<lname>
Description Integer Max. number of characters to use in <name> string (20) 222 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. NETWORK 14.10 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification Description Read IMSI Syntax AT+CIMI Possible Responses
<IMSI>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CIMI=?
OK
ERROR Causes the TA to return <IMSI>, identifying the individual SIM attached to the ME.
<IMSI>
Description string without double quotes International Mobile Subscriber Identity 14.11 AT+CLCK Facility Lock Description Command Possible Responses Request facility lock AT+CLCK=<fac>,
<mode>[,<passwd>
[,<class>]]
Show if the command is supported AT+CLCK=?
when <mode>=2 and command successful:
+CLCK:
<status>[,<class1>
[<CR><LF>+CLCK:
<status>,<class2>[...]]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CLCK: (list of supported <fac>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK The command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or a network facility <fac>. A password is normally needed to carry out such actions. Call barring facilities are based on GSM supplementary services (refer to GSM 02.88 [6]). The interaction of these, with other commands based on other GSM supplementary services, is described in the GSM standard.
<fac >
Description CS PS SC P2 CNTRL (lock CoNTRoL surface (e.g. phone keyboard)) PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when other than current SIM card inserted) SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up and when this lock command issued) SIM PIN2 LZT 123 7263 R1A 223 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<fac >
AO OI AI IR OX NT NM NS NA AB AG AC PN PU PP PC Description BAOC (bar all outgoing calls) BOIC (bar outgoing international calls) BAIC (bar all incoming calls) BIC-Roam (bar incoming calls when roaming outside the home country) BOIC-exHC (bar outgoing international calls except to home country) Bar incoming calls from numbers Not stored to TA memory. Not Supported Bar incoming calls from numbers Not stored to ME memory. Not Supported Bar incoming calls from numbers Not stored to SIM memory. Not Supported Bar incoming calls from numbers Not stored in Any memory. Not Supported All barring services All out going barring services All in coming barring services Network personalization Network subset personalization Service provider personalization Corporate personalization
<mode>
Description 0 1 2 10 Unlock Lock Query status Full lock (only valid for <fac>=PS, after power on always ask for password)
<status>
Description 0 1 Not active Active
<passw>
Description string type Is the same as password specified for the facility from the ME user interface or with change password command,
+CPWD 224 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. NETWORK
<classx>
Description 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 1..30 Voice L1 Data Fax Short message service Data circuit sync Data circuit async Dedicated packet access Voice L2 When no reply is enabled or queried, this gives the time in seconds to wait before the call is forwarded. Default value is 20 14.12 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number Description Command Possible Responses Request subscriber number AT+CNUM Show if the command is supported AT+CNUM=?
+CNUM:
[<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1>
[,<speed>,<service>[,<itc>]][<CR>
<LF>+CNUM:
[<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2>
[,<speed>,<service> [,<itc>]][]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (this information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME). If subscriber has different MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a separate line.
<alphax>
Description Alphanumeric string Associated with <numberx>; used character set should be the one selected with the Select TE character set command, +CSCS
<numberx>
Description String type Phone number of format specified by <typex>
<typex>
Description Integer format Type of address, (refer to GSM 04.08 [3] subclause 10.5.4.7) LZT 123 7263 R1A 225 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<speed>
Description data rate As defined in subclause 6.7 GSM 07.07 [1]
<service>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 Asynchronous modem Synchronous modem. Not supported PAD access (asynchronous). Not supported Packet access (synchronous). Not supported Voice Fax 6..127 All other values below 128 are reserved by GSM 07.07 [1]. Not supported
<itc>
Description 0 1 3.1kHz UDI 226 LZT 123 7263 R1A 14. NETWORK 14.13 AT+COPS Operator Selection Description Command Possible Responses Request operator selection AT+COPS=[<mode>
[,<format>
[,<oper>]]]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Shows the current setting AT+COPS?
Show if the command is supported AT+COPS=?
+COPS:
<mode>[,<format>,
<oper>]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+COPS: list of supported
(<stat>,long alphanumeric <oper>, short alphanumeric
<oper>,numeric
<oper>)s
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM network operator.
<mode>
Description 0 1 3 4 Automatic (<oper> field is ignored) Manual (<oper> field shall be present) Set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do not attempt registration/de-registration (<oper> field is ignored); this value is not applicable in read command response Manual/automatic (<oper> field shall be present); if manual selection fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0) is entered
<format>
Description 0 1 2 Automatic (<oper> field is ignored) Short format alphanumeric <oper>
Numeric <oper>
<oper>
Description string type Format determined by the <format> setting LZT 123 7263 R1A 227 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<stat>
Description 0 1 2 3 Unknown Available Current Forbidden 14.14 AT+CREG Network Registration Description Command Possible Responses Request network registration AT+CREG=[<n>]
Read the command AT+CREG?
Show if the command is supported AT+CREG=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CREG: <n>,<stat>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CREG: (list of supported <n>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Controls the presentation of the unsolicited result code +CREG.
<n>
0 1 Description Disable network registration unsolicited result code,
(default) Enable network registration unsolicited result code
<stat>
Description 0 1 2 3 Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new operator to register with Registered, home network Not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new operator to register with Registration denied 228 LZT 123 7263 R1A 15. Phonebook 15.1 AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum Description Request phone book checksum Command AT*E2PBCS Possible Responses
*E2PBCS: <cks>
+CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command is supported AT*E2PBCS=?
OK
ERROR Causes the ME to return the phone book checksum <cks> stored internally . Phone book checksum is recalculated whenever there is a change in the phone book. By requesting the checksum, the external application can detect if the phone book in the ME has changed, without downloading the whole phone book. During the SIM initialisation process, it takes some time to download the phone book from the SIM card to the ME, depending on the number of entries. In case the command is invoked before the checksum has been calculated, the ME gives an ERROR message.
<cks>
Description Hex type 1 byte in hexadecimal (between ), containing the checksum 15.2 AT*ESAG Ericsson Add to Group Description Command Possible Responses Adds a new item to the group with <gindex>
AT*ESAG=<gindex>,
<type>,
<itemindex>
Show if the command is supported and list the possible settings AT*ESAG=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESAG: (list of supported
<gindex>s, list of supported <type>s
OK
ERROR This command adds a contact or a phone number to the current group. LZT 123 7263 R1A 229 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<gindex>
Description 1-10 The group index within the hierarchical phone book
<type>
Description 1 2 Contact Phone number
<itemindex>
Description Integer The index of the contact/group/phone number to add. The <itemindex> parameter has the following meaning: if the item to add is a contact, the <itemindex> is the index of the contact in the contacts book. If the item to add is a phone number the <itemindex> is the index in the phone book 15.3 AT*ESCG Ericsson Create Group Description Command Possible Responses Adds a new group to the hierarchical phone book AT*ESCG=<name>
Shows if the command is supported AT*ESCG=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESCG:
<maxnamelength>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command creates a new group in the hierarchical phone book. The group is stored at the first available position. There are 10 group positions in the hierarchical phone book.
<name>
String Description The group name. Character set as specified by command Select TE Character Set (AT+CSCS)
<maxnamelength>
Description integer The maximum length of the grouping (bytes) 230 LZT 123 7263 R1A 15. PHONEBOOK 15.4 AT*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number Description Command Possible Responses Set up a credit card number AT*ESCN=<mode>
[,<passwd>][,<indexn>]
[,<asn>,<type>,<name
>,<vercode>[,<send order>]]
Test if the command is supported AT*ESCN=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
when mode=3:*ESCN:
<indexn>,<asn>,<ty pe>,
<name>,<vercode>,
<send order>
When mode=4:*ESCN:
<selindexn>
OK
ERROR
*ESCN: (list of supported
<index>s),(list of supported
<mode>s),(list of supported <send order>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Command is used to:
set up a credit card number in the ME.
disable credit card calls.
enable one of the credit card call services.
query the settings for one of the services.
query the active credit call access server.
<mode>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 Settings for a credit card call (<passwd>, <indexn>,
<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode> [,<send order>]). The four (4) parameters (<passwd>, <indexn>, <asn>,
<vercode>) are mandatory when <mode> = 0. If all those are not submitted ERROR will be returned Disable credit card calling (<passwd>). If any other parameters are submitted, they are ignored Enable one of the credit card call services (<passwd>,
<indexn>). If any other parameters are submitted, they are ignored Query (<passwd>, <indexn>). If any other parameters are submitted, they are ignored Query for the selected credit call access server. If any parameters are submitted, they are ignored
<passwd>
Description String character string, phone lock code PS, PH-SIM LZT 123 7263 R1A 231 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<indexn>
Description 1 2 Index number to the first credit card call access server Index number to the second credit card call access server
<selindexn>
Description 0 1 2
<asn>
String Credit card calling disabled Index number to the first credit card call access server Index number to the second credit card call access server Description Character string <0..9,+>, max. 20 characters Phone number of format specified by <typex>
<type>
Description Integer format Type of address
<name>
Description String Character string of the name tag, for M&M. Maximum of 18 characters
<vercode>
Description String Character string <0..9,# ,*>. Maximum of 20 characters
<send order>
Description 1 2 Verification code first (default) phone number to call first 232 LZT 123 7263 R1A 15. PHONEBOOK 15.5 AT*ESDG Ericsson Delete Group Description Command Possible Responses Deletes a group defined in the hierarchical phone book AT*ESDG=<gindex>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK Show if the command is supported and list the possible <gindex>
AT*ESDG=?
*ESDG: list of
<gindex>s
OK This command deletes the group at position <gindex> from the hierarchical phone book.
<gindex>
Description 1-10 The group index 15.6 AT*ESDI Ericsson Delete Group Item Description Command Possible Responses Deletes the item in group <gindex> with position <index>
AT*ESDI=<gindex>,<ind ex>
Show if the command is supported AT*ESDI=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR The command deletes the item with <index> in the group with
<gindex>.
<gindex>
Description 1-10 The groups index within the hierarchical phone book
<index>
Description 1-15 The items index within the group LZT 123 7263 R1A 233 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 15.7 AT*ESGR Ericsson Group Read Description Lists the groups defined in the hierarchical phone book Command AT*ESGR Shows if the command is supported AT*ESGR=?
Possible Responses
*ESGR: <gindex1>,
<name1>[<CR><LF>
<gindex2>,
<name2>..]
OK
ERROR OK This command lists the groups in the hierarchical phone book.
<gindex>
Description 1-10 The group index
<name>
Description String The group name 15.8 AT*ESIL Ericsson Silence Command Description Command Possible Responses Sets the MS to silent mode AT*ESIL=[<mode>]
Read the current setting AT*ESIL?
Test if the command is supportedand listthe possible settings AT*ESIL=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESIL: <mode>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESIL: (list of supported
<mode>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command orders the phone to be in silent mode. When the phone is in silent mode, all sounds from the MS are prevented. An icon will show the user that silent mode is active.
<mode>
Description 0 1 Silent mode off. Default setting Silent mode on 234 LZT 123 7263 R1A 15. PHONEBOOK 15.9 AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number Description Command Possible Responses Sets a number in the MS Test if the command is supported and show possible settings AT*ESNU=<
type>,<number>
[,<number type>]
AT*ESNU=?
Read the current setting AT*ESNU?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESNU: (list of supported <type>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ESNU: <type 1>,<number 1>,<number type 1><CR><LF>
.*ESNU: <type n>,<number n>,<number type n>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command sets a <type> number, in the format <number type>, in the MS.
<type>
Description 0 1 2 3 Voice L1 Voice L2 Fax Data
<number type>
Description 129 145 Default setting when dialling string does not include the international access code character +
Default setting when dialling string includes the international access code character +
<number>
Description 0-9, +
Number LZT 123 7263 R1A 235 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 15.10 AT+CPBF Phonebook Find Description Syntax Possible Responses Shows the current setting
+CPBF=<findtext>
Show if the command is supported
+CPBF=?
+CPBF:
<index1>,<number>,<type>,
<text>[[...]<CR><LF>+CBPF:
<index2>,<number>,<type>,
<text>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CPBF: <nlength>,<tlength>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Returns phone book entries whose alphanumeric field starts with
<findtext>.
<findtext >
Description string type Field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as specified by the select TE character set command, +CSCS 15.11 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read Description Command Possible Responses Read phone book entries
+CPBR=<index1>
[,<index2>]
Test if the command is supported
+CPBR=?
+CPBR:<index1>,<number>,
<type>,<text>[[,<text_date>,
<text_time>]<CR><LF>+CPBR:
<index2>,<number>,<type>,
<text>[,<text_date>,
<text_time>]]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CPBR: (list of supported
<index>s),<nlength>,<tlength>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Returns phone book entries in location number range <index1>...
<index2> from the current phone book memory storage selected with
+CPBS. If <index2> is left out, only location <index1> is returned. Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone number stored there <number> (of format <type>) and text <text> associated with the number.
<indexn>
Description integer type Values in the range of location numbers of phone book memory 236 LZT 123 7263 R1A 15. PHONEBOOK
<number>
Description string type Phone number of format <type>
<type>
Description 129 145 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number 128 - 255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7
<text>
Description string type Field of maximum length <tlength>;
character set as specified by the select TE character set command, +CSCS.
<nlength>
Description integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
<tlength >
Description integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
LZT 123 7263 R1A 237 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 15.12 AT+CPBS Phone Storage Description Command Possible Responses Set phone book storage AT+CPBS=<storage>
Read the current setting AT+CPBS?
Test if the command is supported AT+CPBS=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CPBS: <storage>
[,<used>,<total>]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CPBS: (list of supported
<storage>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Selects phone book memory storage <storage>, which is used by other phone book commands.
<storage>
Description FD LD ME MT SM TA DC RC MC MV SG CA EN BC HP SIM fix-dialing-phone book SIM Last-dialing-phone book. Not supported ME phone book Combined ME and SIM phone books. Not supported SIM phone book TA phone book. Not supported ME dialed calls list (30 entries) ME received calls list (30 entries) ME missed calls list (30 entries) ME Voice Activated Dialing list. Not supported SMS group list, Ericsson specific. Not supported Callers allowed, Ericsson specific. Not supported SIM emergency number (+CPBW is not applicable for this storage) Own business card. Not supported Hierarchical phone book. Not supported
<passwd>
Description String Represents the password required when selecting password protected <storage>s, for example PIN2 for FD 238 LZT 123 7263 R1A 15. PHONEBOOK 15.13 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write Description Command Possible Responses Request phone book write AT+CPBW=[<index>][,
<number>
[,<type>[,<text>]]]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CPBW=?
+CPBW: (list of supported
<index>s),<nlength>
,(list of supported
<type>s),<tlength>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Writes phone book entry in location number <index> in the current phone book memory storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the
<number> and <text> parameters are omitted, the entry is deleted. If
<index> is omitted but <number> is included, the entry is written to the first free location in the phone book.
<index>
Description integer type Values in the range of location numbers of phone book memory
<number>
Description string type Phone number of format <type>
<type >
Description integer format Type of address octet, default 145 when dialing string includes international access code character "+", otherwise 129. (refer to GSM 04.08 [4] subclause 10.5.4.7) 129 145 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown. Default if no + in sca. ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number. Default if + in sca. ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number 128-255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
<text >
Description string type Field of maximum length <tlength>;
character set as specified by the select TE character set command, +CSCS
<nlength>
Description integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
LZT 123 7263 R1A 239 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<tlength >
Description integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
240 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. Short Message Services - Point to Point 16.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control See 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control 16.2 AT*ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound See 4.15, AT*ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound 16.3 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages See 6.10, AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages 16.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses Set service centre address AT+CSCA=<sca>
[,<tosca>]
OK
ERROR Show the current setting AT+CSCA?
+CSCA:
<sca>,<tosca>
Show if the command is supported AT+CSCA=?
OK
ERROR
OK
ERROR Updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs are transmitted. In text mode, the setting is used by send (+CMGS) and write (+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode, the setting is used by the same commands, but only when the length of the SMSC address coded into <pdu> parameter equals zero. Note that a + in front of the number in <sca> has precedence over the <tosca> parameter, so that a number starting with + will always be treated as an international number.
<sca>
Description string type GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character set LZT 123 7263 R1A 241 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<tosca>
Description integer type GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address type-of-address octet in integer format 129 145 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown. Default if no + in sca. ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number. Default if + in sca. ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number 128-255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7 16.5 AT+CMGF Message Format Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses Set message format AT+CMGF=<mode>
Read the current setting AT+CMGF?
Show if the command is supported AT+CMGF=?
OK
ERROR
+CMGF: <mode>
OK
ERROR
+CMGF: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
ERROR This command tells the TA, which input and output format to use for messages. <mode> indicates the format of messages used with send, list, read and write commands, and unsolicited result codes resulting from received messages. Mode can be either PDU mode (entire TP data units used) or text mode (headers and body of the messages given as separate parameters). Test command returns supported modes as a compound value.
<mode>
Description 0 1 PDU mode Text mode 242 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT 16.6 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Write message to memory AT+CMGW=<length>
[,<stat>]<CR>
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC>
+CMGW: <index>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMGW=?
OK
ERROR Stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location
<index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status will be set to 'stored unsent', but parameter <stat> allows other status values to be given. ME/TA manufacturer may choose to use different default <stat> values for different message types. Entering PDU is the same as specified by the send message command, +CMGS. If writing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<stat>
Description 0 1 2 3 16 Received unread message (i.e. new message). Not supported Received read message. Not supported Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs) Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs). Not supported Template message. Not supported
<index>
Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory
<length>
Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu>
Description
... In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format LZT 123 7263 R1A 243 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Write message to memory AT+CMGW [=<oa/da>
[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]]
<CR>
Text is entered <ctrl-Z/
ESC>
+CMGW: <index>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMGW=?
OK
ERROR Stores message (either SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status will be set to stored unsent, but parameter <stat> allows also other status values to be given. The entering of text is done as specified in the send message command,
+CMGS. If writing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Note!
SMS-COMMANDs and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs cannot be stored in text mode.
<stat>
Description 0 1 2 3 Received unread message (new message). Not supported Received read message. Not supported Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs) Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs). Not supported
<oa>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given by <tooa>
<da>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given by <toda>
<tooa>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer <toda>) 244 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
<toda>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<index>
Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory 16.7 AT+CMGS Send Message PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send message AT+CMGS=<length>
<CR>
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/
ESC>
+CMGS:
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMGS=?
OK
ERROR Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:
<err> is returned. This command is abortable.
<length> must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP layer data unit to be given (i.e. SMSC address octets are excluded).
The TA shall send a four character sequence
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after command line is terminated with <CR>; after that PDU can be given from TE to ME/TA.
The DCD signal is in the ON state as PDU is given.
The echoing of given characters back from the TA is controlled by V.25ter echo command E.
The PDU shall be hexadecimal format (similarly as specified for
<pdu>) and given in one line; ME/TA converts this coding into the actual octets of PDU.
When the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>) equals zero, the SMSC address set with command Service Centre Address +CSCA is used.
Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27). LZT 123 7263 R1A 245 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of PDU .
<mr>
Description Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<length>
Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
<ackpdu>
Description
... GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by double quote characters like a normal string type parameter Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send message AT+CMGS=<da>
[,<toda>] <CR>
Text is entered<ctrl-Z/
ESC>
+CMGS:
<mr>[,<scts>]
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMGS=?
OK
ERROR Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <scts> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:
<err> is returned. This command is abortable.
The entered text (GSM 03.40 TP-Data-Unit) is sent to address <da>
and all current settings (refer Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP and Service Centre Address +CSCA) are used to construct the actual PDU in the ME/TA.
The TA shall send a four character sequence
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after the command line is terminated with <CR>; after that text can be entered from the TE to the ME/TA.
The DCD signal is in the ON state as text is entered.
The echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by V.25ter echo command E. 246 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
The entered text should be formatted as follows:
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-
Data-Header-Indication is not set:
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set +CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return entered by the user);
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to character P (GSM 23));
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-
Indication is set: the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an octet with integer value 42).
Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body.
<da>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given by <toda>
<toda>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<mr>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer <dt>)
<mr>
Integer Description GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference LZT 123 7263 R1A 247 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 16.8 AT+CMSS Send From Storage PDU mode Description Command Possible Responses Send from storage AT+CMSS=<index>
+CMSS: <mr>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMSS=?
OK
ERROR Sends message with location value <index> from message storage
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code
+CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable.
<index>
Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory
<mr>
Description Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send from storage AT+CMSS=<index>
[,<da> [,<toda>]]
+CMSS: <mr> [,<scts>]
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMSS=?
OK
ERROR Sends message with location value <index> from message storage
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and network supports, <scts> is returned. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable.
<index>
Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory 248 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
<da>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given by <toda>
<toda>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<scts>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer <dt>)
<mr>
Description Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format 16.9 AT+CMGC Send Command PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send command message AT+CMGC=<length><CR>
<pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>
Show if the command is supported AT+CMGC=?
if PDU mode
(+CMGF=0) and sending successful:
+CMGC:
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]
if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
OK
ERROR Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-
COMMAND). The entering of PDU is as specified in the send message command, +CMGS. Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS
<service> value is 1 and network supports) <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable. LZT 123 7263 R1A 249 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<length>
Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu>
String Description In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
<mr>
Description Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<ackpdu>
Description String GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by double quote characters like a normal string type parameter Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Send command message AT+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>
[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]
<CR>
Text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC>
if PDU mode
(+CMGF=1) and sending successful:
+CMGC:
<mr>[,<scts>]
if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Show if the commands is supported AT+CMGC=?
OK
ERROR
OK
ERROR Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-
COMMAND). The entering of text is as specified in the send message command, +CMGS, but the format is fixed to be a sequence of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers, which the ME/TA converts into 8-bit octets (refer to +CMGS). Message reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when
+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <scts> is returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited 250 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable.
<fo>
Description 0 1 2 3
<ct>
Integer
<pid>
0-255
<mn>
Integer First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format Description GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type (default 0) Description Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value = 0. According to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9 Description GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Number
<da>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given by <toda>
<toda>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<mr>
Description Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<scts>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer <dt>) LZT 123 7263 R1A 251 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 16.10 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses Set preferred message storage AT+CPMS=<mem1>
[,<mem2>]
[,<mem3>]
+CPMS:
<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,
<total2>,<used3>,<total3>
Read the command AT+CPMS?
Show if the command is supported AT+CPMS=?
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CPMS:
<mem1>,<used1>,<total1,
<mem2>,<used2>,<total2,
<mem3>,<used3>,<total3>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CPMS: (list of supported
<mem1>s),(list of supported <mem2>s),(list of supported <mem3>s)
OK
ERROR Selects memory storage <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for reading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME
(but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err>
shall be returned. Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA.
<mem1>
Description string type Memory from which messages are read and deleted
(commands List Messages +CMGL, Read Message
+CMGR and Delete Message +CMGD) ME SM ME message storage SIM message storage
<mem2>
Description string type Memory to which writing and sending operations are made (commands Send Message from Storage +CMSS and Write Message to Memory +CMGW) ME SM ME message storage SIM message storage 252 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
<mem3>
Description string type Memory to which received SMs are preferred to be stored
(unless forwarded directly to TE). Received CBMs are always stored in BM (or some manufacturer specific storage) unless directly forwarded to TE ME SM ME message storage SIM message storage
<used1>,<used2>,<used3> Description integer type Total number of messages currently in
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively
<total1>,<total2> ,<total3> Description integer type Total number of message locations in
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively 16.11 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set new message indication to TE AT+CNMI=[<mode>
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>[,
<bfr>]]]]]
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Shows the current setting AT+CNMI?
Show if the command is supported AT+CNMI=?
+CNMI:
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,
<bfr>
OK
ERROR
+CNMI:
(list of supported <mode>s),
(list of supported <mt>s),
(list of supported <bm>s),
(list of supported <ds>s),
(list of supported <bfr>s)
OK
ERROR Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal is ON. If the TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038). LZT 123 7263 R1A 253 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<mode>
Description 3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link specific inband technique used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<mt>
Description 0 1 2 3 No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE. No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error message accordingly to GSM 03.38 SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code but not stored in ME/TA:
+CMT:[<alpha >], <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled) Class 2 data coding scheme result in indication as defined in <mt>=1 Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result codes +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>. Class 3 SMS-DELIVER is not stored in ME/TA. Messages of other data coding schemes result in indication as defined in <mt>=1
<bm>
Description 0 2 Store message to BM (or some manufacturer specific memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled). New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory
<ds>
Description 0 1 2 No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE. SMS-STATUS-
REPORT is stored in ME/TA SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CDS: < length>< CR>< LF>< pdu> (PDU mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (PDU mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA 254 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
<bfr>
0 Description TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when <mode> 1..2 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes). Not supported Unsolicited Result codes:
+CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CDSI: <mem><index>
Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set new message indication to TE AT+CNMI=[<mode>
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>[,
<bfr>]]]]]
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Shows the current setting AT+CNMI?
Show if the command is supported AT+CNMI=?
+CNMI:
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,
<bfr>
OK
ERROR
+CNMI:
(list of supported <mode>s),
(list of supported <mt>s),
(list of supported <bm>s),
(list of supported <ds>s),
(list of supported <bfr>s)
OK
ERROR Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal is ON. If TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038). If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<mode>
Description 3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link specific inband technique used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode LZT 123 7263 R1A 255 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<mt>
Description 0 1 2 3 No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE. No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error message accordingly to GSM 03.38 SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code:
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [ ,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (text mode enabled). About parameters in italics, refer to the show text mode command, +CSDH Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result codes +CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [
,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR>
<LF><data> (Text Mode enabled). About parameters in italics, refer to the show text mode command, +CSDH. Messages of other data coding schemes result in indication as defined in <mt>=1
<bm>
Description 0 2 Store message to BM (or some manufacturer specific memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CBM:
<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>
(Text mode enabled)
<ds>
Description 0 1 2
<bfr>
0 No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code: : +CDS:
<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (Text mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA Description TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when <mode> 1...2 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes). Not supported 256 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT Unsolicited Result codes:
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts>
[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF>
<data> (Text Mode enabled). Refer to the show text mode command,
+CSDH for information on the parameters in italics.
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
+CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
+CDSI: <mem><index>
16.12 AT+CMGR Read Message PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses Read message AT+CMGR=
<index>
+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>]
<CR><LF><pdu>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMGR=?
OK
ERROR Returns message with location value <index> from preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire message data unit <pdu> is returned. If status of the message is received unread, status in the storage changes to received read. If reading fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<stat>
Description 0 1 2 3 16 Received unread message (i.e. new message) Received read message Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs) Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs) Template message. Not supported
<index>
Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory
<alpha>
Description String type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not omitted LZT 123 7263 R1A 257 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<length>
Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu>
Description In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Read message AT+CMGR=
<index>
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and SMS-DELIVER:+CMGR:
<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>,[<tooa>,
<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and SMS-SUBMIT:+CMGR:
<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>],[<toda>,<fo>,
<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and SMS-STATUS-
REPORT:+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>
,<dt>,<st>
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and SMS-
COMMAND:+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],
[<toda>],<length><CR><LF><cdata>]
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and CBM storage:+CMGR:
<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,
<pages><CR><LF><data>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMGR=?
OK
ERROR Returns messages with location index <index> from message storage
<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH), If the status of the message is received unread, status in the storage changes to received read. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<index>
Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by
<mem1>
258 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
<stat>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 Received unread message (new message) Received read message Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs) Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs) All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command). Not supported
<oa>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given by <tooa>
<da>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given by <toda>
<toda>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<tooa>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<tora>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<alpha>
Description String type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not omitted, i.e. commas shall mark the place were it should be. Used character set should be the one selected with command Select TE Character Set +CSCS
<scts>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer <dt>) LZT 123 7263 R1A 259 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<length>
Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length)
<data>
The entered text should be formatted as follows:
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and
<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set
+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return entered by the user);
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to character P (GSM 23));
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an octet with integer value 42);
sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body
<fo>
Description 0 1 2 3
<mr>
Integer First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format Description GSM 03.40 TP-Message_Reference
<ra>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSM default alphabet) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character set (refef command
+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>
260 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
<dt>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/mm/
dd,hh:mm:sszz where characters indicate year, month, day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone
<st>
Description Integer GSM 03.40 TP-status
<ct>
Integer
<sn>
Integer Description GSM 03.40 TP--command-type (default 0) Description GSM 03.41 CBM serial number
<mid>
Description String type All different possible combinations of CBM message identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);
e.g. 0,1,5-7
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM message identifier in integer format
<page>
Description Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 4-7 in integer format
<pages>
Description Integer type GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 0-3 in integer format
<pid>
0 - 255
<dcs>
0 - 255 Description Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value = 0, according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9 Description Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.48. UCS2 and compressed text not supported
<sca>
Description String type GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character set LZT 123 7263 R1A 261 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<tosca>
Description Integer type GSM 04.11 RP SC address type-of-address octet in integer format 129 145 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown. Default if no + in sca ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number. Default if + in sca ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number 128 - 255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
<vp>
0 - 143 144 - 167 168 - 196 197 - 255 Description
(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e. 5 minute intervals up to 12 hous) 12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)
(TP-VP-166) x 1 day
(TP-VP-192) x 1 week
<mn>
Description Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-message-number 262 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT 16.13 AT+CMGL List Message PDU Mode Description Command Possible Responses List message AT+CMGL
[=<stat>]
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>
<CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR>
<LF><pdu>[]]
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMGL=?
+CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)
OK
ERROR Note!
Returns messages with status value <stat> from preferred message storage <mem1> to the TE. Entire data units <pdu> are returned. If status of the message is received unread, status in the storage changes to received read. If listing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR:
<err> is returned.
<stat>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 16 Received unread message (i.e. new message) Received read message Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs) Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs) All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command) Template message. Not supported
<index>
Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory
<alpha>
Description String type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not omitted
<length>
Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length) LZT 123 7263 R1A 263 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<pdu>
Description In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)) In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses List message AT+CMGL
[=<stat>]
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and SMS-SUBMITs and/or SMS-DELIVERs:
+CMGL: <index1>,<stat>,<oa/da>,
[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/
toda>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>[<CR>
<LF>
+CMGL: <index2>,<stat>,<oa/da>,
[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/
toda>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>[]]
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs:
+CMGL:<index1>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,
[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:<index2>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,
[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[]]
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and SMS-COMMANDs:
+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>
[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[]]
if text mode (+CMGF=1), command successful and CBM storage:
+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,
<page>,<pages>,<CR><LF><data>
[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,<sn>,
<mid>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF>
<data>[]]
otherwise:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMGL=?
+CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)
OK
ERROR Returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage
<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH). If the status, of the message is received unread, status in the storage changes to received read. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<index>
Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by
<mem1>
264 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
<stat>
Integer 0 1 2 3 4 Description Indicates the status of messages in memory Received unread message (new message) Received read message Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs) Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs) All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)
<oa>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given by <tooa>
<da>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given by <toda>
<toda>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<tooa>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<tora>
Description String type GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<alpha>
Description String type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not omitted i.e. commas shall mark the place were it should be. Used character set should be the one selected with command Select TE Character Set +CSCS LZT 123 7263 R1A 265 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<scts>
Description String type GSM 03.40 TP-service-centre-time-stamp in time-string format (refer <dt>)
<length>
Description Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length) 16.14 AT+CMGD Delete Message Common for both PDU and Text modes Description Command Possible Responses Delete message AT+CMGD=<index>
[,<delflag>]
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CMGD=?
OK
ERROR Deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location
<index>. If <delflag> is present and not set to 0 then the ME will ignore
<index> and follow the rules for <delflag> shown below. If deleting fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Test command shows the valid memory locations and optionally the supported values of <delflag>.
<index>
Description Integer type Indicates multiple messages delation request as follows 0 1 2 3 4 Delete the message specified in <index>
Delete all read messages from preferred message storage, leaving unread messages and stored mobile originated messages (whether sent or not) untouched Delete all read messages from preferred message storage and sent mobile originated messages, leaving unread messages and unsent mobile originated messages untouched Delete all read messages from preferred message storage, sent and unsent mobile originated messages leaving unread messages untouched Delete all messages from preferred message storage including unread messages
<index>
Description Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory 266 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT 16.15 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters Only Applicable to Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set the show text mode AT+CSDH=[<show>]
Display current settings AT+CSDH?
Show if the command is supported AT+CSDH=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
+CSDH: <show>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CSDH: (list of supported <show>s)
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
Controls whether detailed header information is shown in text mode result codes.
<show>
Description 0 1 Do not show header values defined in commands AT+CSCA and AT+CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>,
<pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in
+CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and SMS-SUBMITs in text mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in +CMGR result code, do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>,
<length> or <cdata>
Show the values in result codes 16.16 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters Only Applicable to Text Mode Description Command Possible Responses Set the text mode parameters AT+CSMP=[<fo
> [,<vp>[,<pid>
[,<dcs>]]]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Display current settings AT+CSMP?
+CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>
+CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command is supported AT+CSMP=?
+CSMP: (List of supported <fo>s),
(list of supported <vp>s), (list of supported <pid>s), (list of supported <dcs>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the SM is received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0 255). The
<pid> parameter identifies the higher protocol being used or indicates 267 LZT 123 7263 R1A GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL interworking with a certain type of telematic service and <dcs> deter-
mines the way the information is encoded as in GSM 03.38.
<fo>
0-255
<vp>
0-143 144-167 168-196 197-255
<pid>
0-255
<dcs>
0-255 Description Depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17),SMS-
STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (default 2) in integer format Description
(TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e 5 minutes intervals up to 12 hous) 12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)
(TP-VP-166) x 1 day
(TP-VP-192) x 1 week Description Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value = 0. According to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9 Description Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.38. UCS2 and compressed text not supported 16.17 AT+CSCS Select Character Set Description Command Possible Responses Set command informs TA which character set is used by the TE AT+CSCS=<chset>
OK
ERROR Show the current setting AT+CSCS?
+CSCS: <chset>
OK
ERROR Show list of supported character sets AT+CSCS=?
+CSCS: (list of supported <chset>s)
OK
ERROR This command informs the TA which character set <chset> is used by the TE. The TA is then able to convert character strings correctly between TE and ME character sets. When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and the used TE alphabet is 7-bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero. Note!
How the internal alphabet of ME is converted to, or from, the TE alphabet is manufacturer specific. 268 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT Read command shows current setting and test command display conversion schemes implemented in the TA.
<chset >
Description GSM IRA GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1). Default setting International reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50 [3]). Note:
recommended default setting by GSM 07.07. [2]
8859-n ISO 8859 Latin n (1-6) character set
"UTF8"
UCS2 Universal text format, 8 bits Unicode, 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character set (ISO/IEC10646) 16.18 AT*ESTL Ericsson SMS Template List Edit Description Command Possible Responses Add or delete item to SMS template list AT*ESTL=<stix>
[,<text>]
+CME ERROR
OK
ERROR List all entries in SMS template list AT*ESTL?
*ESTL:
<stix1>,<text1>[<CR><LF><stix2>,
<text2>[]]
+CME ERROR
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT*ESTL=?
*ESTL: (list of supported
<stix>s),<ntext>
OK
ERROR This command adds an SMS template, specified by the <text>
parameter, to the list of SMS templates at the position specified by the
<stix> parameter. If the list already contains an SMS template at the position <stix> this template is overwritten by the template given by the
<text> parameter. If the <text> parameter is omitted, the command removes the SMS Template from the list at the position specified by the <stix> parameter. The read command lists all entries in the SMS Template list.
<stix>
Description Integer value Index to list of SMS templates
<text>
Description String value SMS template text LZT 123 7263 R1A 269 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<ntext>
Description Integer value Maximum length of the SMS template (<text>-parameter) 16.19 AT+CSMS Select Message Service Common for both PDU and Text Modes Description Command Possible Responses Select message service AT+CSMS=<service>
Show supported message types along with the current service setting AT+CSMS?
+CSMS:
<mt>,<mo>,<bm>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CSMS:
<service>,<mt>,<mo>,
<bm>
OK
ERROR Show list of supported services AT+CSMS=?
+CSMS: (list of supported <service>s)
OK
ERROR Selects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messages supported by the ME: <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> for mobile originated messages and <bm> for broadcast type messages. If the chosen service is not supported by the ME (but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
<service >
Description 0 1 GSM 03.40 and 03.41. The syntax of SMS AT commands is compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+
features which do not require new command syntax may be supported (e.g. correct routing of messages with new Phase 2+ data coding schemes) GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (the syntax of SMS AT commands is compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2+ version; the requirement of <service> setting 1 is mentioned under corresponding command descriptions). Not supported 2..127 Reserved
<mt>
Description 0 1 Mobile terminated messages not supported Mobile terminated messages supported 270 LZT 123 7263 R1A 16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
<mo>
Description 0 1 Mobile originated messages not supported Mobile originated messages supported
<bm>
Description 0 1
<err>
0...127 Broadcast messages not supported Broadcast messages supported Description GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values 128...255 GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values 300 302 304 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 500
...511 512... ME failure Operation not allowed Invalid PDU mode parameter SIM not inserted SIM PIN required PH-SIM PIN required SIM failure SIM busy SIM wrong SIM PUK required SIM PIN2 required SIM PUK2 required Unknown error Other values in range 256...511 are reserved Manufacturer specific LZT 123 7263 R1A 271 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 272 LZT 123 7263 R1A 17. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast 17.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE See 16.11, AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE 17.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type Common for both PDU and text modes Description Command Possible Responses Select cell broadcast message type AT+CSCB=[<mode>
[,<mids>[,<dcss>]]]
Shows the current setting AT+CSCB?
Show if the command is supported AT+CSCB=?
+CMS ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CSCB:
<mode>,<mids>,
<dcss>
OK
ERROR
+CSCB: (list of supported
<mode>s)
OK
ERROR Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME.
<mode>
Description 0 1 Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are not accepted. Not supported
<mids>
Description string type All different possible combinations of CBM message identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);
e.g. 0,1,5-7
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer format
<dcss>
Description string type All different possible combinations of CBM data coding schemes (refer to <dcs>). Default is empty string);
e.g. 0-3,5. Not supported LZT 123 7263 R1A 273 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 274 LZT 123 7263 R1A 18. SIM Application Toolkit 18.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control See 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control 18.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings Description Command Possible responses Set the presentation of the unsolicited result codes corresponding to STK Read the current status of the presentation of the unsolicited result codes AT*E2STKS=<on_off>
AT*E2STKS?
Test if the command is supported AT*E2STKS=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
*E2STKS: <on_off>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
*E2STKD: list of supported <on_off>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Allows the external application to disable/enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands. Parameter <on_off> is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code *E2STK. Setting chosen is stored internally so that it is not necessary to change it each time the ME is switched on. If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled, the messages below are not be sent to the application. The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default.
<on_off>
Description 0 1 Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes related to STK (default) Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes related to STK LZT 123 7263 R1A 275 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 18.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text Description Command Possible responses Answer to the reception of DISPLAY TEXT Test if the command is supported AT*E2STKD <answer>
AT*E2STKD=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
*E2STKD:
(list of supported <answer>)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR The ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code
*E2STKD. Command AT*E2STKD allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout expires. If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is generated. Test command returns the list of supported <answer>.
<answer>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 OK. Performed as required: the text was displayed and cleared as requested. It corresponds to 00 Command performed successfully, described in the GSM standard OK. User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to end the proactive session. It corresponds to 10 Proactive session terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard OK. User requests backwards move: the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session. It corresponds to 11 Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user OK. No response from user: the text was displayed, and although the clear condition was Wait for user to clear, the user did not react. It corresponds to 12 No response from user FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed 276 LZT 123 7263 R1A 18. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT 18.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey Description Command Possible responses Answer to the reception of GET INKEY AT*E2STKG =<answer>,
[<response_type>,
<user_response>]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Test if the command is supported AT*E2STKG=?
*E2STKG:
(list of supported <answer>),
(list of supported
<response_type>),
(list of supported
<user_response>)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR The ME passes the parameters within GET INKEY command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKG. The external application then sends AT*E2STKG with the user response. Answer command allows the external application to send the appropriate answer, after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout expires. If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is generated. If <answer> parameter is 4, a failure has occurred and no more parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates ERROR.
<user_response>
Description String type Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type format between . Coding is defined in <response_type>. Length shall be 2 bytes when coding is UCS2 . Otherwise it shall be 1 byte LZT 123 7263 R1A 277 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<answer>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 OK. Performed as required: the text was displayed. It corresponds to 00 Command performed successfully, described in the GSM standard OK. User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to end the proactive session. It corresponds to 10 Proactive session terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard OK. User requests backward move: the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session. It corresponds to 11 Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user OK. No response from user: the text was displayed, and the user did not react. It corresponds to 12 No response from user FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
<response_type>
Description 0 1 2 3 Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +) Response type shall be SMS default alphabet Response type shall be UCS2 alphabet Response type shall be Yes/No response 18.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input Description Command Possible responses Answer to the reception of GET INPUT AT*E2STKI <answer>,
[<response_type>,
<response_length>,
<user_response>]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Test if the command is supported AT*E2STKI=?
*E2STKI: (list of supported
<answer>),(list of supported
<response_type>),
(list of supported
<prompt_text_length>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR The ME shall pass the parameters within GET INPUT command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKI. The external application sends AT*E2STKI with the user response. Command AT*E2STKI allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout expires. If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is generated. 278 LZT 123 7263 R1A 18. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT If <answer> parameter is 4, a failure has occurred and no more parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates ERROR. If <response_type>=2 (UCS-2), the length of <user_response> is an even number of bytes. Otherwise, the ME gives an ERROR message. If <response_type>=3 (Yes/No), the length of <user_response> is 1 byte. Otherwise, the ME gives an ERROR message. Note!
Note!
<user_response>
Description String type Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type format between . Coding is defined in <response_type>
<answer>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 OK. Performed as required: the text was displayed. It corresponds to 00 command performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard OK. User terminated session: the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to end the proactive session. It corresponds to 10 proactive session terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard OK. User requests backward move: the text was displayed as requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session. It corresponds to 11 backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user OK. No response from user: the text was displayed, and the user did not react. It corresponds to 12 No response from user FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
<response_type>
Description 0 1 2 3 Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +) Response type shall be SMS default alphabet Response type shall be UCS2 alphabet Response type shall be Yes/No response
<response_length>
Description Integer type (0-160) Value indicating the length of response field
<user_response>. It shall be an integer within the range between <min_length_response> and
<max_length_response>
LZT 123 7263 R1A 279 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<prompt_coding>
Description 0 1 2 Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. data coding scheme of 8 bit It corresponds to Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet Text is coded in UCS2 alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 16 bit UCS2 alphabet
<prompt_text_length>
Description Integer type (0-210) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<prompt_text>
<prompt_text>
Description String type Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>, in string type between . Coding is defined in
<prompt_coding>
18.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item Description Command Possible responses Answer to the reception of SELECT ITEM Test if the command is supported AT*E2STKL=<answer>,
[<user_response>]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR AT*E2STKL=?
*E2STKL: (list of supported
<answer>),
(list of supported
<user_response>)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR The ME shall pass the parameters within SELECT ITEM command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code
*E2STKL. Command AT*E2STKL allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout expires. If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is be generated. 280 LZT 123 7263 R1A 18. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT If <answer> parameter is 4, a failure has occurred and no more parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates ERROR.
<user_response>
Description integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 29. It identifies the selected <item_idn> within the items list
<answer>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 OK. Performed as required. It corresponds to 00 command performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard OK. User terminated session. It corresponds to 10 Proactive session terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard OK. User requests backwards move. It corresponds to 11 Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user OK. No response from user. It corresponds to 12 no response from user FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed 18.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu Description Command Possible responses Answer to the reception of SET UP MENU Test if the command is supported AT*E2STKM=<answer>,
<on_off>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR AT*E2STKM=?
*E2STKM: (list of supported
<answer>),(list of supported
<on_off>)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR The ME passes the parameters within SET UP MENU command to the external application, so that the STK menu can be built externally, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKM. The current menu can be removed by sending only the parameter
<on_off> = 0. Answer command allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout expires. LZT 123 7263 R1A 281 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response shall be generated.
<answer>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 OK. Performed as required: it corresponds to 00 command performed successfully, described in the GSM standard OK. User Terminated Session: the command was executed as requested and the user wants to end the proactive session. It corresponds to 10 proactive session terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard OK. User requests backwards move: the command was executed as requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session. It corresponds to 11 backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user OK. No response from user: the command was executed, and the user did not react. It corresponds to 12 no response from user FAILED. Screen is busy FAILED. Command beyond MEs capability. It corresponds to 30. It was not possible to successfully integrate or remove the list of menu items Values follow GSM 11.14 standard. See General Result byte within Result TLV corresponding to TERMINAL RESPONSE.
<on_off>
Description 0 1 Remove the current menu New menu to be displayed According to GSM 11.14 if the ME receives the "Item dat object for item 1" as a null data object, then <on_off> shall be set to 0. The maximum length is fixed. Notice that 227 bytes come from substracting the bytes corresponding to E2STKM: x,
<CR><LF>E2STKM: x,x from 255. As a result, an extra parameter defining the maximum length is not required. With the coding defined in GSM 11.11, the first byte defines the coding scheme. As a result, an extra parameter defining the coding is not required. Values follow the definition of Identifier of Item in Item TLV object, within SET-UP MENU command, as described in GSM 11.14. The maximum length is fixed. Notice that 226 bytes come from subtracting the occupied bytes from 255. As a result, an extra parameter defining the maximum length is not required. 282 LZT 123 7263 R1A 18. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT 18.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection) Description Command Possible responses Do the menu selection Test if the command is supported AT*E2STKN <sel_item>
AT*E2STKN=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
*E2STKN: (list of supported
<sel_item>)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR The application informs the ME about the selected menu item by means of the AT*E2SKTN command. The ME answers with OK, or ERROR. The Do command allows the external application to select the menu item in the item list that was created by means of the SET-UP MENU command.
<sel_item>
Description integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 29. It identifies the selected menu item corresponding to SET-UP MENU command Values follow the definition of Item Identifier TLV object, within ENVELOPE (MENU SELECTION) command, as described in GSM 11.14. 18.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call Description Command Possible responses Answer to the reception of SET UP CALL Test if the command is supported AT*E2STKC=<answer>
AT*E2STKC=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
*E2STKC: (list of supported
<answer>)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR The ME passes the parameters within SET UP CALL command to the external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKC, so that it takes up the decision on progressing or rejecting the call. Answer command allows the external application to send the appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the timeout expires. LZT 123 7263 R1A 283 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR response is generated.
<answer>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 OK. Performed as required. It corresponds to 00 command performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard OK. User terminated session. It corresponds to 10 Proactive session terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard OK. User requests backwards move. It corresponds to 11 backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user OK. No response from user. It corresponds to 12 no response from user FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed FAILED. User rejected call set-up request. It corresponds to 22 FAILED. User cleared down call before connection or network release. It corresponds to 23 284 LZT 123 7263 R1A 19. Supplementary Services 19.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control See 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control 19.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter Description Command Possible Responses Reset the ACM
(Accumulated Call Meter) value on the SIM AT+CACM=[<passwd>]
Show the current value AT+CACM?
Tests if the command is supported AT+CACM=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CACM: <acm>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value in SIM file EFACM. ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required to reset the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Refer subclause 9.2 for <err> values. Note!
This command must take into account what line is chosen with AT*ELIN or via the MMI Read command returns the current value of ACM.
<passwd>
Description String type SIM-PIN2
<acm>
Description String type Accumulated call meter value similarly coded as <ccm>
under +CAOC LZT 123 7263 R1A 285 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 19.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum Description Command Possible Responses Set command sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM file EFACMmax AT+CAMM=[<acmmax
>[,<passwd>]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Read the current value AT+CAMM?
Test if the command if supported AT+CAMM=?
+CAMM:
<acmmax>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. When ACM (refer +CACM) reaches ACMmax calls are prohibited (see also GSM 02.24 [26]). SIM PIN2 is usually required to set the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.
<acmmax>
Description String type Accumulated call meter maximum value similarly coded as <ccm> under +CAOC; value zero disables ACMmax feature
<passwd>
Description String type SIM PIN2 286 LZT 123 7263 R1A 19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 19.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge Description Command Possible Responses Execute command AT+CAOC[=<mode>]
Read command, shows the current mode AT+CAOC?
Test command, shows if the command is supported AT+CAOC=?
[+CAOC: <ccm>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
+CAOC: <mode>
OK
ERROR
[+CAOC: (list of supported
<mode>s]
OK
ERROR Use of Advice of Charge supplementary service command (GSM 02.24
[11] and GSM 02.86 [12]) enables the subscriber to get information about the cost of calls. With <mode>=0, the execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME. The command also includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited event reporting of the CCM information. The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes, but no more than every 10 seconds. Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is made with the same command. Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activated or not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is supported. It is recommended (although optional) that the test command return the supported mode values.
<mode>
Description 0 1 2 Query CCM value Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value
<ccm>
Description String type Three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g. 00001E indicates decimal value 30); value is in home units and bytes are similarly coded as ACMmax value in the SIM LZT 123 7263 R1A 287 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 19.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table Description Command Possible Responses Set command sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and currency table in SIM file EFPUCT AT+CPUC=<currency>,
<ppu>[,<passwd>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR Shows the current values AT+CPUC?
Shows if the command is supported AT+CPUC=?
+CPUC:
<currency>,<ppu>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
OK
ERROR Sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and currency table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used to convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM) into currency units. SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2 (depending on which SIM card that is used) is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current parameters of PUCT. For information on the character set see AT+CSCS in the Short Message Services section.
<currency>
Description String Alpha-identifier of the currency code (3 characters, e.g. SEK)
<ppu>
Description String type price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g. 2.66)
<passwd>
Description String type SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2 288 LZT 123 7263 R1A 19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 19.6 AT*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function Description Command Possible Responses Enable and disable notification with the unsolicited result code
*EDIF AT*EDIF=<onoff>
Show the current setting AT*EDIF?
Show if the command is supported AT*EDIF=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EDIF: <onoff>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EDIF: (list of supported <onoff>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command enables and disables notification of divert status changes with the unsolicited result code *EDIF.
<onoff>
Description 0 1 Disable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF Enable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF LZT 123 7263 R1A 289 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 19.7 AT*EIPS Identity Presentation Set Description Command Possible Responses Sets the alpha tag to be displayed in the ME AT*EIPS=<ID>,
<alphatag mode>
Read the current setting AT*EIPS?
Test if the command is supported and list the possible settings AT*EIPS=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EIPS: <ID1>,<alphatag mode1><CR><LF>
*EIPS:<ID2>,<alphatag mode2><CR><LF>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*EIPS: (list of supported ID>s),(list of supported
<alphatag mode>s)
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command enables or disables the presentation of the alpha tag of the Caller ID and Called ID to the TE if the ID is recognized. The alpha tag is the first name and the last name. The presentation is done by an unsolicited result code, *ELIP for Caller ID and *EOLP for Called ID.
<ID>
1 2 Description Caller ID (*ELIP) Called ID (*EOLP)
<alphatag mode>
Description 0 1 Off First name and last name displayed 290 LZT 123 7263 R1A 19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 19.8 AT*ELIN Ericsson Line Set Description Command Possible Responses Set the current line to
<line>
AT*ELIN=<line>
Read the current line AT*ELIN?
Test if the command is supported AT*ELIN=?
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ELIN: <line>
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR
*ELIN: list of supported <line>s
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
ERROR This command requests the ME to set the current line to <line>. Note!
The following command reads its value from the current line and is thus affected by the use of *ELIN:
AT+CACM - Accumulated Call Meter
<line>
Description 1 2 L1 L2 19.9 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions Description Syntax Possible Responses Request Calling forwarding number and conditions AT+CCFC=<reason>
,<mode>[,<number
> [,<type>[,<class>
[,<subaddr>
[,<satype>
[,<time>]]]]]]
Show if the command is supported AT+CCFC=?
+CME ERROR <err>
when <mode>=2 and command successful:
+CCFC:
<status>,<class1>[,<number>,
<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>
[,<time>]]][<CR><LF>
+CCFC:
<status>,<class2>[,<number>,<t ype>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,<ti me>]]][...]]
OK
ERROR
+ CCFC: (list of supported
<reason>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary service according to 3GPP TS 22.082 [4]. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query are supported. When querying LZT 123 7263 R1A 291 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL the status of a network service (<mode>=2) the response line for not active case (<status>=0) should be returned only if service is not active for any <class>.
<reason>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 Unconditional Mobile busy No reply Not reachable All call forwarding (refer 3GPP TS 22.030 [19]) All conditional call forwarding (refer 3GPP TS 22.030 [19])
<mode>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 Disable Enable Query status Registration Erasure
<number>
Description string type String type phone number of forwarding address in format specified by <type>
<type>
Description integer format Type of address octet
(refer GSM 04.08 [3] section 10.5.4.7) 129 145 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international unknown. Default setting if + is not in <sca>
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number. Default setting if '+' is in <sca>
ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number 128 - 255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 [3] section 10.5.4.7
< subaddr >
Description string type string type subaddress of format specified by <satype>. Not supported 292 LZT 123 7263 R1A 19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
<satype>
Description integer format Type of subaddress octet 128 136 160 168 NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), even number of address signals NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), odd number of address signals User defined, even number of address signals User defined, odd number of address signals 128 - 255 Other values reserved
< classx >
Description integer Sum of integers each representing a class of information. Default value=7 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
<time>
1..30 Voice L1 Data Fax Short message service Data circuit sync Data circuit async Dedicated packet access Dedicated PAD access Description When no reply is enabled or queried, this gives the time in seconds to wait before a call is forwarded, default value is 20. Not supported
< status >
Description 0 1 Not active Active LZT 123 7263 R1A 293 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 19.10 AT+CCWA Call Waiting Description Command Possible Responses Request call waiting AT+CCWA=[<n>
[,<mode>
[,<class>]]]
when<mode>=2 and command successful:
+CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<CR>
<LF>
+CCWA: <status>,<class2>[]]
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Show the current setting AT+CCWA?
+CCWA: <n>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR Show if the command is supported AT+CCWA=?
+CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service according to 3GPP TS 22.083 [5]. Activation, deactivation and status query are supported. When querying the status of a network service
(<mode> = 2) the response line for 'not active' case (<status> = 0) should be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CCWA:
<number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the TE when call waiting service is enabled. The command is abortable when the network is interrogated. The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS standards. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
<n>
0 1 Description Disable Enable
<mode>
Description 0 1 2 Disable Enable Query status 294 LZT 123 7263 R1A 19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
< classx >
Description integer Sum of integers each representing a class of information. Default value=7 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Voice L1 Data Fax Short message service Data circuit sync Data circuit async Dedicated packet access Dedicated PAD access
<status >
Description 0 1 Not active Active
<number >
Description String type String type phone number of forwarding address in format specified by <type>
<type >
Description Integer format Type of address octet in integer format (GSM 04.08 10.5.4.7, [3]);
<err>
Description 0 3 4 21 30 31 Phone failure Operation not allowed Operation not supported Invalid index No network service Network timeout 100 Unknown LZT 123 7263 R1A 295 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 19.11 AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty Description Command Possible Responses Request call related supplementary services AT+CHLD=<n>
Show if the command is supported AT+CHLD=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CHLD: (list of supported <n>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR This command allows control of the following call related services:
a call can be temporarily disconnected from the ME but the connection is retained by the network;
multiparty conversation (conference calls);
the served subscriber who has two calls (one held and the other either active or alerting) can connect the other parties and release the served subscriber's own connection. Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation, and transferred similarly as defined in 3GPP TS 22.030. This is based on the GSM/UMTS supplementary services HOLD (Call Hold; refer 3GPP TS 22.083 [5] clause 2), MPTY (MultiParty; refer 3GPP TS 22.084 [22]) and ECT (Explicit Call Transfer; refer 3GPP TS 22.091 [29]). The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS standards. Note!
Call Hold and MultiParty are only applicable to teleservice 11. It is recommended (although optional) that test command returns a list of operations which are supported. The call number required by some operations is denoted by x (e.g. +CHLD: (0,0x,1,1x,2,2x,3)).
<n>
Description
... 0 0X 1 1X Integer type; equals to numbers entered before SEND button in GSM 02.30 [7] subclause 4.5.5.1 Releases all held calls or sets User Determined User Busy
(UDUB) for a waiting call Releases a specific call X from a held multiparty call Releases all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the other (held or waiting) call Releases a specific active call X 296 LZT 123 7263 R1A
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
<n>
Description 2 2X 3 4 Places all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts the other (held or waiting) call Places all active calls on hold, except call X with which communication is supported Adds a held call to the conversation Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber from bothcalls X is the numbering (starting with 1) of the call given by the sequence of setting up or receiving the calls (active, held or waiting) as seen by the served subscriber. Calls hold their number until they are released. New calls take the lowest available number. Where both a held and a waiting call exists, the above procedures shall apply to the waiting call
(i.e. not to the held call) in conflicting situation. Note!
The directory number case shall be handled with dial command D, and the END case with hangup command H (or +CHUP). 19.12 AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification Description Command Possible Responses Request calling line identification AT+CLIP=<n>
Shows the current setting AT+CLIP?
Show if the command is supported AT+CLIP=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+ CLIP : <n>,<m>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+ CLIP : (list of supported <n>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR This command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service CLIP
(Calling Line Identification Presentation) that enables a called subscriber to get the calling line identity (CLI) of the calling party when receiving a mobile terminated call. Set command enables or disables the presentation of the CLI at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service CLIP in the network. Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIP service according 3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>).Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value LZT 123 7263 R1A 297 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
<n>
0 1 Description Disable Enable
<m>
Description 0 1 2 CLIP not provisioned CLIP provisioned Unknown (e.g. no network) Note!
When CLI is not available ( <CLI validity>=2), <number> shall be an empty string () and <type> value will not be significant. Nevertheless, TA may return the recommended value 128 for <type> ((TON/NPI unknown in accordance with GSM 04.08 [8] subclause 10.5.4.7). When CLI has been withheld by the originator, (<CLI validity>=1) and the CLIP is provisioned with the "override category" option (refer 3GPP TS 22.081[3] and 3GPP TS 23.081[40]), <number> and <type> is provided. Otherwise, TA shall return the same setting for <number>
and <type> as if the CLI was not available.
<err>
Description 0 3 4 21 30 31 Phone failure Operation not allowed Operation not supported Invalid index No network service Network timeout 100 Unknown 298 LZT 123 7263 R1A 19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES 19.13 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction Description Command Possible Responses Request calling line identification restriction AT+CLIR=[<n>]
Read the current setting AT+CLIR?
Test if the command is supported AT+CLIR=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CLIR: <n>,<m>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CLIR: (list of supported <n>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR This command refers to CLIR-service according to GSM 02.81 [6] that allows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the CLI to the called party when originating a call. Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted or allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment for all following outgoing calls. Using the opposite command can revoke this adjustment. If this command is used by a subscriber without provision of CLIR in permanent mode the network will act according GSM 02.81 [6]. The setting shall be per logical channel. When the MS is turned off and then turned on again the parameter setting <n> shall turn back to default, i.e. the presentation of CLI shall be used according to the subscription of the CLIR service, <n> is 0. Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls
(given in <n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIR service (given in <m>). Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. Note!
On a per call base CLIR functionality is explained in subclause ITU-T V.25ter [13] dial command.
<n>
Description 0 1 2 Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service CLIR invocation CLIR suppression LZT 123 7263 R1A 299 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL
<m>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 CLIR not provisioned CLIR provisioned in permanent mode Unknown (e.g. no network) CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed 19.14 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification Description Command Possible Responses Presentation of notification result codes from TA to TE AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]]
Read the current setting AT+CSSN?
Test if the command is supported AT+CSSN=?
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CSSN: <n>,<m>
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR
+CSSN: (list of supported <n>s),(list of supported <m>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
OK
ERROR This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications. The set command enables/disables the presentation of notification result codes from TA to TE. When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile originated call setup, unsolicited result code +CSSI:
<code1>[,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result codes presented in this ETS or in V.25ter [13]. When several different
<code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSI result code. When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forward check supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited result code +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>] is sent to TE. In case of MT call setup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command
"Calling line identification presentation +CLIP") and when several different <code2>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its own +CSSU result code. Note!
The difference between <index> and <cindex> is that <index> is a position mark while <cindex> is a unique value for each CUG. <index>
is not supported. 300 LZT 123 7263 R1A 19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
<n>
0 1 Description Disable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA Enable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA
<m>
Description 0 1 Disable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA Enable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA
<code1>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Unconditional call forwarding is active Some of the conditional call forwarding are active Call has been forwarded Call is waiting This is a CUG call (also <index> present) Outgoing calls are barred Incoming calls are barred CLIR suppression rejected
<index>
Description 09 10 CUG index No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)
<code2>
Description 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 This is a forwarded call (MT call setup) This is a CUG call (also <index> present) (MT call setup) Call has been put on hold (during a voice call) Call has been retrieved (during a voice call) Multiparty call entered (during a voice call) Call on hold has been released (this is not a SS notification) (during a voice call) Forward check SS message received (can be received whenever) 10 Incoming call has been forwarded LZT 123 7263 R1A 301 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 19.15 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data Description Command Possible Responses AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK Request unstructured supplementary service data Show supported message types along with the current service setting AT+CUSD?
Show list of supported services AT+CUSD=?
+CUSD: <n>
OK
ERROR
+CUSD: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
ERROR This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) according to GSM 02.90. Both network and mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD response from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD:
<m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE. In addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancel an ongoing USSD session. If <n> is not given then the default value 0 is taken. When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response USSD string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The response USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent unsolicited +CUSD: result code. The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard. Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound value. Some different scenarios are shown below:
An incoming network initiated USSD-Notify should be presented to the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the external application has enabled result code presentation.
An incoming USSD-request asking for a reply should sent to the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the external application has enabled result code.
If the external application answers to the request with the command AT+CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network.
A USSD-request sent with the command AT+CUSD from the external application. 302 LZT 123 7263 R1A 19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES The different alternatives are shown below. Network Mobile Equipment External application Signal Sends unsolicited result code +CUSD Result code presentation enabled, presented Signal asking for reply Sends unsolicited result code +CUSD Result code presentation enabled, presented Answer AT+CUSD Sends AT+CUSD 1 2 3 3b
<n>
Description 0 1 2 Disable result code presentation in the TA Enable result code presentation in the TA Terminate (abort) USSD dialogue. This value is not applicable to the read command response
<str>
Description string String type USSD (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not interrogated):
-If <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used:
*if TE character set other than HEX (refer command Select TE Character Set +CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to rules of GSM 07.05 Annex A If TE character set is HEX: ME/TA converts each 7-bit character of GSM alphabet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. character P (GSM 23) is presented as 17 (IRA 49 and 55)). Not supported
- if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit data coding scheme is used: ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)). Not supported LZT 123 7263 R1A 303 GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL 304 LZT 123 7263 R1A 20. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands AT Command Description Page No. AT AT&C AT&D AT&F AT&W AT*
Attention Command Circuit 109 (DCD) Control Circuit 108 (DTR) Response Set to Factory Defined Configuration Store User Profile List all Supported AT Commands AT*E2APR M2M Ausio Profile Manipulation AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode AT*E2ESC M2M M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time AT*E2IO Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write AT*E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum AT*E2PHFB Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable AT*E2SPN AT*E2SSN M2M Service Provider Indication Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey AT*E2STKI AT*E2STKL M2M STK Get Input M2M STK Select Item AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection) AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings AT*EALR AT*EALS AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Line Request Ericsson Request ALS Status Ericsson Audio Mode Selection 189 197 197 189 190 190 127 209 121 211 207 195 182 229 133 217 221 283 276 277 278 280 281 283 275 129 217 130 305 LZT 123 7263 R1A GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL AT Command Description Page No. AT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring AT*ECSP AT*EDIF AT*EDST Ericsson Customer Service Profile Ericsson Divert Function Ericsson Daylight Saving Time AT*EENMEA NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2 AT*EIPS AT*ELAM AT*ELIN AT*EMAR AT*EMIC AT*EMIR AT*ENAD AT*EPEE AT*EPNR AT*EPNW AT*EPRR AT*EPRW AT*ERIL AT*ERIN AT*ERIP AT*ESAG AT*ESCG AT*ESCN AT*ESDG AT*ESDI AT*ESGR AT*ESIL AT*ESIR AT*ESLN AT*ESMA AT*ESMM AT*ESNU Identity Presentation Set Ericsson Local Audio Mode Ericsson Line Set Ericsson Master Reset Ericsson Microphone Mode Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request Ericsson Internet Account Define Ericsson Pin Event Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network Ericsson Personal Ring Type Read Ericsson Personal Ring type Write Ericsson Ring Level Set Ericsson Ring Set Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command Ericsson Add to Group Ericsson Create Group Ericsson Set Credit Card Number Ericsson Delete Group Ericsson Delete Group Item Ericsson Group Read Ericsson Silence Command Read MS System Interface Release Ericsson Set Line Name Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound Ericsson Settings Minute Minder Ericsson Settings Number 132 100 218 289 102 181 290 133 291 103 134 134 185 103 219 220 136 137 139 140 141 229 230 231 233 233 234 234 190 222 142 104 235 306 LZT 123 7263 R1A 20. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS AT Command Description Page No. AT*ESOM Ericsson Settings Own Melody AT*ESTL AT*EWBA AT*EWBR Ericsson SMS Template List Edit Ericsson WAP Bookmark Add Ericsson WAP Bookmark Read AT*EWCG Ericsson WAP CSD Gateway AT*EWCT AT*EWDT AT*EWHP AT*EWIL AT*EWLI AT*EWPA AT*EWPB AT*EWPN AT*EWPR AT*EXVC Ericsson WAP Connection Timeout Ericsson WAP Download Timeout Ericsson WAP Homepage Ericsson WAP Image Load Ericsson WAP Login Ericsson WAP Push Access Setting Ericsson WAP Preferred Bearer Ericsson WAP Profile Name Ericsson WAP Profile Ericsson SET External Volume Control AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter AT+CALA AT+CALD Set Alarm (Not Supported in SIR 1.0) Alarm Delete AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum AT+CAOC Advice of Charge AT+CAPD Postpone or Dismiss an Alarm AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type AT+CCFC Call Forwarding Number and Conditions AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date AT+CCWA Call Waiting AT+CEER AT+CFUN Extended Error Report Set Phone Functionality AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach AT+CGDATA Enter Data State AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification 142 269 171 172 173 174 174 175 175 176 177 177 178 179 144 285 104 105 286 287 105 147 291 106 294 106 107 151 152 153 154 156 191 307 LZT 123 7263 R1A GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL AT Command Description Page No. AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification AT+CHLD AT+CHSC AT+CHSD AT+CHSN AT+CHSR AT+CHSU AT+CHUP AT+CIMI AT+CIND AT+CLAC AT+CLCK AT+CLIP AT+CLIR AT+CMEE AT+CMER Call Hold and Multiparty HSCSD Current Call Parameters HSCSD Device Parameters HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration HSCSD Parameters Report HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading Hang Up Call Subscriber Identification Indicator Control List All Available AT Commands Facility Lock Calling Line Identification Calling Line Identification Restriction Mobile Equipment Error Mobile Equipment Event Reporting AT+CMGC Send Command AT+CMGD Delete Message AT+CMGF Message Format AT+CMGL List Message AT+CMGR Read Message AT+CMGS Send Message AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory AT+CMOD Call Mode AT+CMSS Send From Storage AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol 191 192 157 158 160 163 164 192 296 165 166 167 169 170 90 223 108 109 223 297 299 109 110 249 266 242 263 257 245 243 91 248 201 308 LZT 123 7263 R1A 20. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS AT Command Description Page No. AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE AT+CNUM Subscriber Number AT+COPS Operator Selection AT+CPAS AT+CPBF AT+CPBR AT+CPBS Phone Activity Status Phonebook Find Phonebook Read Phone Storage AT+CPBW Phonebook Write AT+CPIN AT+CPMS AT+CPUC PIN Control Preferred Message Storage Price Per Unit and Currency Table AT+CPWD Change Password AT+CR AT+CRC Service Reporting Control Cellular Result Code AT+CREG Network Registration AT+CRES AT+CRLP AT+CSAS AT+CSCA AT+CSCB AT+CSCS AT+CSDH AT+CSMP AT+CSMS AT+CSQ AT+CSSN AT+CTZU AT+CUSD AT+CVHU AT+GMI AT+GMM AT+GMR AT+ICF Restore Settings Radio Link Protocol Save Settings Service Centre Address Select Cell Broadcast Message Type Select Character Set Show Text Mode Parameters Set Text Mode Parameters Select Message Service Signal Strength Supplementary Service Notification Automatic Time Zone Update Unstructured Supplementary Service Data Voice Hang-Up Read Manufacturer Identification Read Model Identification Read Revision Identification Cable Interface Character Format 253 225 227 111 236 236 238 239 113 252 288 115 117 117 228 203 149 118 241 273 268 267 267 270 118 300 119 302 92 193 193 194 204 309 LZT 123 7263 R1A GM47/GM48 INTEGRATORS MANUAL AT Command Description Page No. AT+IFC AT+ILRR AT+IPR AT+VTS DTE-DCE Local Flow Control Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting Cable Interface Port Command DTMF and Tone Generation AT+WS46 Mode Selection ATA ATD ATE ATH ATI ATL ATM ATO ATP ATQ ATS0 ATS2 ATS3 ATS4 ATS5 ATS6 ATS7 ATS8 Answer Dial Command Echo Hang up Identification Information Monitor Speaker Loudness Monitor Speaker Control Return to Online Data Mode Select Pulse Dialling Result Code Suppression Automatic Answer Control Escape Sequence Character Command Line Termination Character Response Formatting Character Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE) Blind Dial Delay Control Connection Completion Timeout Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control ATT ATV ATX ATZ Select Tone Dialling DCE Response Format Call Progress Monitoring Control Reset To Default Configuration 205 205 206 92 198 85 86 198 88 194 88 145 89 89 95 95 96 96 97 98 98 99 99 100 89 199 90 200 310 LZT 123 7263 R1A
| 1 | revised page | Users Manual | 20.85 KiB | November 06 2002 |
GM47/48 Design Guidelines 6.6 SAR warning If the application is using an antenna which is less than 20cm away from the any part of the users body, integrators are legally obliged to publish SAR figures for the product. This testing would need to be carried out by the system integrator. The GM48 module is FCC approved for fixed and mobile applications. If the final product after integration is intended for portable use, a new application and FCC ID is required. Even if SAR measurements are not required it is considered good practice to insert a warning in any manual produced indicating it is a radio product and that care should be taken. 6.7 Other TA issues 6.7.1 External Application software If the software of the external application is changed it has no effect upon the type approval certificate issued to it. 6.7.2 GM47 software updates If the GM47 software is updated there should be no further action required by the system integrator as accessories lists are generally carried across between TA certificates and any software supplied by Sony Ericsson will be fully Type Approved. BA/SEM/MSC 02:0006 Rev PB1 24
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2002-06-26 | 1850.2 ~ 1908.75 | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2002-06-26
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Sony Mobile Communications Inc
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0018919456
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
4-12-3 Higashi-Shinagawa
|
||||
| 1 |
Tokyo, N/A 140-0002
|
|||||
| 1 |
Japan
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
PY7
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
6220501-BV
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
M****** K******
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Head of Regulatory
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
+8136********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
+46 1********
|
||||
| 1 |
M******@sonymobile.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
H****** S****
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
Im Teelbruch 122
|
||||
| 1 |
Lund, 22188
|
|||||
| 1 |
Sweden
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
+4646********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
+4646********
|
||||
| 1 |
h******@sonyericsson.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
M******** H********
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
Nya Vattentornet
|
||||
| 1 |
Lund, 22188
|
|||||
| 1 |
Sweden
|
|||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
+4646********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
+4646********
|
||||
| 1 |
m******@sonyericsson.com
|
|||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | TNB - Licensed Non-Broadcast Station Transmitter | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Transmitter module for mobile applications | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | This application was originally granted on 06/25/2002. | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
CETECOM GmbH
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
W******** R******
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
0049-******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
0049-********
|
||||
| 1 |
w******@cetecom.de
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1908.75 | 1.4 | 1 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 22.901(d) | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.11 | 1 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC